Modular devices Minia

Minia

Min

ia

Modular devices

Mod

ular

dev

ices

Any changes reserved

N1-2011-A

www.oez.com

www.oez.com

OEZ s.r.o.Šedivská 339561 51 LetohradCzech Republictel.: +420 465 672 111 +420 465 672 101fax: +420 465 672 398 +420 465 672 151e-mail: [email protected]

MiniaModular devices

INDEX ...................................................................................................................................................A

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS...................................................................................................................B

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS.....................................................................................................C

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS.........................................................................................................................D

OTHER DEVICES..................................................................................................................................................E

GLOSSARY ............................................................................................................................................................F

CONTENTS

We recommend to use Modular devices in plastic and steel-plastic switchboards DistriTon, see catalogue Distribution boards and switchboard cabinets Distri.

Minia

A3

Modular devices

INDEX

A

APN.............................................E29AS................................................E57AST..............................................E29AVN.............................................E32

C

CS-FH000.................................... E59

CS-L.............................................E59

CS-N............................................E59

CS-PE.......................................... E59

E

EKC..............................................E53

ES-35-GS.....................................E53

G

G1L..............................................E52

G2L..............................................E52

G3L..............................................E52

G4L..............................................E52

L

LPE..............................................B2

LPN............................................. B7

LST...............................................B15

M

MAP.............................................E27

MAR............................................ E27

MCR.............................................E13

MIR............................................. E20

MKA............................................ E45

MQA............................................ E24

MQB............................................ E24

MQC............................................ E24

MSK.............................................E38

MSP............................................. E32

MST............................................. E40

MT2.............................................E42

MTR.............................................E17

MTX.............................................E42

N

N3x10-FH000..............................E57

O

OD-LP-MP01............................... B30

OD-LP-VP01................................ B29

OD-LP-VU01................................B28

OD-MIR....................................... E20

OFE..............................................C14

OFI...............................................C17

OLE..............................................C2

OLI...............................................C6

P

PS-LP........................................... B19

PS-LS...........................................B19

PS-LV...........................................C12

PS-OF...........................................C22

PS-OF125.................................... C22

PS-RSI......................................... E6

R

RLP.............................................. E11

RPR............................................. E2

RSI...............................................E4, E5

S

S1L..............................................E52

S2L..............................................E52

S3L..............................................E52

S4L..............................................E52

SC................................................E35, E43, E45

SD................................................E35, E43, E45

SE................................................E35, E43, E45

SG................................................E35, E43, E45

SJB.............................................. D3, D4

SJBC............................................ D8

SP-LP........................................... B25

SP-LS...........................................B25

SVBC............................................D9

SVC..............................................D12

SVD..............................................D16

SVF...............................................D19

SV-LP........................................... B22

SV-LS...........................................B22

SVM.............................................D13

T

TB................................................E37, E40

TC................................................E37, E40

TE................................................E37, E40

TG................................................E37, E40

U

UMB............................................ E47

UMZ............................................ E47

UNZ.............................................E48

UNZR...........................................E48

UTZ..............................................E48

Z

ZSE.............................................. E51

ZSF...............................................E51

Minia

A4

Modular devices

NOTES

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Minia

B

��Miniature circuit breakers LPE up to 63 A (6 kA)......................................................... B2

��Miniature circuit breakers LPN up to 63 A (10 kA)...................................................... B7

��Miniature circuit breakers LST up to 125 A (10 kA).................................................. B15

��Auxiliary and relative switches.......................................................................................... B19

��Shunt trips..................................................................................................................................... B22

��Undervoltage releases............................................................................................................. B25

��Locking insert.............................................................................................................................. B28

��Sealing insert............................................................................................................................... B29

��Insulating barriers..................................................................................................................... B30

Minia

B2

LPE Miniature circuit breakers

Miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole

In

[A]

Characteristic B Characteristic C Number Weight Package

Type Product code Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]

2 LPE-2B-1 34528 LPE-2C-1 34549 1 0.135 124 LPE-4B-1 34529 LPE-4C-1 34550 1 0.135 126 LPE-6B-1 34530 LPE-6C-1 34551 1 0.135 12

10 LPE-10B-1 34532 LPE-10C-1 34553 1 0.135 1213 LPE-13B-1 34533 LPE-13C-1 34554 1 0.135 1216 LPE-16B-1 34534 LPE-16C-1 34555 1 0.135 1220 LPE-20B-1 34535 LPE-20C-1 34556 1 0.135 1225 LPE-25B-1 34536 LPE-25C-1 34557 1 0.135 1232 LPE-32B-1 34537 LPE-32C-1 34558 1 0.135 1240 LPE-40B-1 34538 LPE-40C-1 34559 1 0.135 1250 LPE-50B-1 34539 LPE-50C-1 34560 1 0.135 1263 LPE-63B-1 34540 LPE-63C-1 34561 1 0.135 12

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) ��Series of circuit breakers for building, housing and similar

installations up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c. and 60/220 V d.c.

��For protection of cables and conductors against overload

and short-circuit.

��Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 60898.

��Current-limiting circuit breakers.

��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary and relative

switches, undervoltage releases and shunt trips,

interconnecting busbars etc.

��Possibility of locking and sealing in off or on position.

��Possibility of interconnection with residual current

circuit breakers OLE (OLI) and OFE (OFI) by means

of interconnecting busbars.

Miniature circuit breakers, 3-poleI

n

[A]





AccessoriesAuxiliary and relative switches PS-LP-.. page B19

Shunt trips SV-LP-.. page B22

Undervoltage releases SP-LP-.. page B25

Locking insert OD-LP-VU01 page B28

Sealing insert OD-LP-VP01 page B29

Insulating barriers OD-LP-MP01 page B30

Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. page E52

Terminal extensions AS-.. page E57

Miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole

In

[A]





Minia

B3


MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA) Description

EASY CONNECTION ��Upper and lower combined terminal with a secured screw

makes it possible to connect interconnecting busbars with forks and conductors up to 25 mm2 by one screw.

��Plastic cover fi lls in the space under the terminal and thus prevents wrong insertion of conductor to the terminal.

�� Top and bottom connection of circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.

��Bottom connection of circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.

��Interconnecting busbars and terminal extensions see on page E52 - E57.

NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR ��Unambiguously defi ne the state of the circuit breaker.

In [A] Colour

2 �� pink 4 �� brown 6 �� green10 �� red13 �� sandy16 �� grey20 �� blue25 �� yellow32 �� violet40 � black50 �� white63 �� copper

��Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser – it is

indelible.

NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT��Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated

current of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond with

the colours of the threaded fuse-links.

WITHDRAWAL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER FROM THE LINE

OF DEVICES��Without interruption of adjacent current circuits.

��Provided by special top and bottom pawl.

��Withdrawal at top connection (circuit breakers, tumbler

power switches) and at bottom connection (circuit breakers

and residual current circuit breakers).

Lever down Lever up

SWITCHED OFF SWITCHED ON

Secured screw

For interconnecting busbars with forks

For conductors up to 25 mm2

Plastic coverFor interconnecting busbars wiht pins

Top connection Bottom connection

Minia

B4


MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPE UP TO 63 A (6 kA)

Type LPE

Standards EN 60898-1

Approval marks

Number of poles 1, 2, 3

Tripping characteristics B, C

Rated current In 2 ÷ 63 A

Rated operating voltage Ue 230/400 V a.c. / 60/220 V d.c. 1)

Max. operating voltage Umax

253/440 V a.c. / 66/242 V d.c. 1)

Min. operating voltage Umin

12 V a.c. / d.c.

Rated frequency fn 40 ÷ 60 Hz

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898) Icn

6 kA

Endurance mechanical 20 000 operating cycles

electrical 4 000 operating cycles

Energy limitation class 3

Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp

6 kV

Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) IV

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35

Degree of protection IP20

Connection conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷10) mm2

conductor Cu - flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2

interconnecting busbar IEC - thickness 2 mm

torque 2 Nm

top or bottom connection yes

Operating conditions ambient temperature -30 ÷ +55 °C

working position arbitrary

seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2)

Specifi cations

1) Single-pole connection / two-pole connection2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Internal impedance Z, powers losses P, impedance Zs

In

Z 1) P 1) Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2)

[A] [mΩ/pole] [W/pole] characteristic B characteristic C

2 375.00 1.50 23.1 12.84 98.00 1.55 11.6 6.46 26.00 0.95 7.7 4.3

10 12.60 1.25 4.6 2.613 10.80 1.85 3.6 2.016 7.56 1.95 2.9 1.620 5.70 2.30 2.3 1.325 4.24 2.65 1.8 1.032 2.72 2.80 1.4 0.840 2.18 3.50 1.2 0.650 1.56 3.90 0.9 0.563 1.37 5.40 0.7 0.41) Average values per pole protected2) For TN network. U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker

Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LPEI

nCorrection of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to + 60 °C [A] 1) Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2)

[A] -30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2 2.6 2.5 2.4 2.3 2.2 2.1 2 1.9 1.8 1.7 2 1.9 1.8 1.8 1.7 1.7 1.7 1.7

4 5.2 5 4.8 4.6 4.4 4.2 4 3.7 3.5 3.4 4 3.8 3.7 3.6 3.5 3.4 3.4 3.4

6 7.8 7.5 7.2 6.9 6.6 6.3 6 5.6 5.3 5 6 5.7 5.5 5.3 5.2 5.1 5.1 5.1

10 13 12.5 12 11.5 11 10.5 10 9.3 8.8 8.4 10 9.5 9.2 8.9 8.7 8.5 8.5 8.5

13 16.9 16.3 15.6 15 14.3 13.7 13 12.1 11.4 10.9 13 12.4 11.9 11.6 11.3 11.1 11.1 11.1

16 20.8 20 19.2 18.4 17.6 16.8 16 14.9 14.1 13.4 16 15.2 14.7 14.2 13.9 13.6 13.6 13.6

20 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 18.6 17.6 16.8 20 19 18.3 17.8 17.3 17.1 17 17

25 32.5 31.3 30 28.8 27.5 26.3 25 23.3 22 21 25 23.8 22.9 22.3 21.7 21.3 21.3 21.3

32 41.6 40 38.4 36.8 35.2 33.6 32 29.8 28.2 26.9 32 30.4 29.3 28.5 27.7 27.3 27.2 27.2

40 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 37.2 35.2 33.6 40 38 36.6 25.6 34.7 34.1 34 34

50 65 62.5 60 57.5 55 52.5 50 46.5 44 42 50 47.5 45.8 44.5 43.4 42.7 42.5 42.5

63 81.9 78.8 75.6 72.5 69.3 66.2 63 58.6 55.4 52.9 63 59.9 57.7 56.1 54.6 53.7 53.6 53.61) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic at reference temperature 30 °C 2) Valid for reference temperature 30 °C

Minia

B5



Dimensions

Diagram

17.5 35 52.5

~73

64

72

86~90

35

~4.5 44

~4.5

45

LPE-..-1 LPE-..-2 LPE-..-3

2

1 3

42

1 3

42

1

6

5

LPE-..-1 LPE-..-2 LPE-..-3

Selectivity of LPE miniature circuit breakers characteristics B with back-up fuses [kA] Selectivity of LPE miniature circuit breakers characteristics C with back-up fuses [kA]

LPE PN, PV gG LPE PN, PV gGI

n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 I

n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

2 x 1 6 6 6 6 6 6 2 x 1 6 6 6 6 6 64 x 1 1.5 6 6 6 6 6 4 x 1 1.5 6 6 6 6 66 x 1 1.5 2 6 6 6 6 6 x 1 1.5 2 6 6 6 6

10 x 1 1.5 2 5 6 6 6 10 x x 1.5 2 5 6 6 613 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 6 13 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 616 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 6 16 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 6 620 x x x 2 2.5 5 6 6 20 x x x x 2.5 5 6 625 x x x x 2.5 5 6 6 25 x x x x 2.5 5 6 632 x x x x x 3.5 6 6 32 x x x x x 3.5 6 640 x x x x x 1 5 6 40 x x x x x x 5 650 x x x x x x 3 6 50 x x x x x x 3 663 x x x x x x 3 6 63 x x x x x x x 6

x - without selectivity x - without selectivity

The time selectivity of particular combination up to the value of short-circuit current

Ik

shown in the table is ensured in case of short-circuit behind the LPE circuit breaker

with back-up fuse-link.

Which means that at short-circuit of particular combination under the Ik

value only

the circuit breaker actuates. In case the short-circuit current value is bigger than Ik´

value then also the back-up fuse-link actuates.

Example:

Circuit breaker LPE-16B-... actuates earlier than back-up fuse-link with rated current

50 A up to short-circuit current 2.5 kA. LPE

PV, PN gG

Ik

1

2

5

10

30

60

120

min

.

10 000

5 000

1 000

500

100

50

10

5

1

0.5

0.1

0.01

0.001

0.002

0.006

1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80

B C

B C

x In

1.13

I n

1.45

I n

t[s

]v

At ambient temperature +30°C

Minia

B6



Characteristics

��Characteristic B: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which does not cause

current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.).

The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In

.

��Characteristic C: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes current

surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.).


.

Tripping characteristics of circuit breakers according to EN 60898-1

Thermal releaseTripping characteristic type

B, C

Conventional non-tripping current Int

for t ≥ 1 h Int

= 1,13 In

Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h I

t = 1,45 I

n

Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s (for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I3

= 2,55 In 1 s < t < 120 s (for I

n > 32 A)

t - break time of the circuit breaker

Electromagnetic releaseTripping characteristic type

B C

Current I4 pro 0,1 s < t < 45 s (for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I4

= 3 In 0,1 s < t < 90 s (for I

n > 32 A)

0,1 s < t < 15 s (for In

≤ 32 A)I

4 = 5 I

n0,1 s < t < 30 s (for In

> 32 A)

Current I5 for t < 0,1 s I

5 = 5 I

nI

5 = 10 I

n


It

[As]

22

LPE-..C-1

I [A]p

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

1000

0

2 A

4 A

6 A

10 A13 A

63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A

Characteristics I2t

LPE-..B-1

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

1000

0

2 A

4 A

6 A

10 A13 A

63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A

Minia

B7

LPN Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)��For building, commercial and industrial installations

up to 63 A 230/400 V a.c. and 220/440 V d.c.


and short-circuit.

��Tripping characteristics B, C, D according to EN 60898.

��Current-limiting circuit breakers.

��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary and relative

switches, undervoltage releases and shunt trips,

interconnecting busbars etc.

��Breaking capacity Icn

10 kA – to achieve higher Icn

(up to

120 kA) it is recommended to use cylindrical fuse-links

PV in fuse switch-disconnectors.

��Possibility of interconnection with residual current

circuit breakers OLE (OLI) and OFE (OFI) by means

of interconnecting busbars.

��Possibility of locking and sealing in off or on position.

��N-pole of circuit breakers LPN-...-1N and LPN-...-3N

contains neither thermal nor short-circuit release, in

switching on it closes before and in switching off it

opens after the other poles.

��For circuit breakers LPN-DC-... device polarity must be

always observed in connecting.


nCharacteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package

[A] Type Product code Type Product

code Type Product code

of modules [kg] [pcs]

0.2 LPN-0,2B-1 34159 LPN-0,2C-1 33880 LPN-0,2D-1 33901 1 0.135 120.4 LPN-0,4B-1 34160 LPN-0,4C-1 33881 LPN-0,4D-1 33902 1 0.135 120.5 - - LPN-0,5C-1 33882 LPN-0,5D-1 33903 1 0.135 120.6 LPN-0,6B-1 34161 LPN-0,6C-1 33883 LPN-0,6D-1 33904 1 0.135 120.8 LPN-0,8B-1 33863 LPN-0,8C-1 33884 LPN-0,8D-1 33905 1 0.135 12

1 LPN-1B-1 33864 LPN-1C-1 33885 LPN-1D-1 33906 1 0.135 121.2 LPN-1,2B-1 33865 LPN-1,2C-1 33886 LPN-1,2D-1 33907 1 0.135 121.6 LPN-1,6B-1 33866 LPN-1,6C-1 33887 LPN-1,6D-1 33908 1 0.135 12

2 LPN-2B-1 33867 LPN-2C-1 33888 LPN-2D-1 33909 1 0.135 124 LPN-4B-1 33868 LPN-4C-1 33889 LPN-4D-1 33910 1 0.135 126 LPN-6B-1 33869 LPN-6C-1 33890 LPN-6D-1 33911 1 0.135 128 LPN-8B-1 33870 LPN-8C-1 33891 LPN-8D-1 33912 1 0.135 12

10 LPN-10B-1 33871 LPN-10C-1 33892 LPN-10D-1 33913 1 0.135 1213 LPN-13B-1 33872 LPN-13C-1 33893 LPN-13D-1 33914 1 0.135 1216 LPN-16B-1 33873 LPN-16C-1 33894 LPN-16D-1 33915 1 0.135 1220 LPN-20B-1 33874 LPN-20C-1 33895 LPN-20D-1 33916 1 0.135 1225 LPN-25B-1 33875 LPN-25C-1 33896 LPN-25D-1 33917 1 0.135 1232 LPN-32B-1 33876 LPN-32C-1 33897 LPN-32D-1 33918 1 0.135 1240 LPN-40B-1 33877 LPN-40C-1 33898 LPN-40D-1 33919 1 0.135 1250 LPN-50B-1 33878 LPN-50C-1 33899 LPN-50D-1 33920 1 0.135 1263 LPN-63B-1 33879 LPN-63C-1 33900 LPN-63D-1 33921 1 0.135 12

Miniature circuit breakers 1+N-poleI

n

[A]

Characteristic B Characteristic C Characteristic D Number Weight Package

Type Product code Type Product



2 - - LPN-2C-1N 33933 - - 2 0.25 64 - - LPN-4C-1N 33934 - - 2 0.25 66 LPN-6B-1N 33922 LPN-6C-1N 33935 LPN-6D-1N 33946 2 0.25 68 LPN-8B-1N 33923 LPN-8C-1N 33936 LPN-8D-1N 33947 2 0.25 6

10 LPN-10B-1N 33924 LPN-10C-1N 33937 LPN-10D-1N 33948 2 0.25 613 LPN-13B-1N 33925 LPN-13C-1N 33938 LPN-13D-1N 33949 2 0.25 616 LPN-16B-1N 33926 LPN-16C-1N 33939 LPN-16D-1N 33950 2 0.25 620 LPN-20B-1N 33927 LPN-20C-1N 33940 LPN-20D-1N 33951 2 0.25 625 LPN-25B-1N 33928 LPN-25C-1N 33941 LPN-25D-1N 33952 2 0.25 632 LPN-32B-1N 33929 LPN-32C-1N 33942 LPN-32D-1N 33953 2 0.25 640 LPN-40B-1N 33930 LPN-40C-1N 33943 LPN-40D-1N 33954 2 0.25 650 LPN-50B-1N 33931 LPN-50C-1N 33944 LPN-50D-1N 33955 2 0.25 663 LPN-63B-1N 33932 LPN-63C-1N 33945 LPN-63D-1N 33956 2 0.25 6

Minia

B8


MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)Miniature circuit breakers, 2-pole

In

[A]





0.2 - - LPN-0,2C-2 33968 LPN-0,2D-2 33989 2 0.26 60.4 - - LPN-0,4C-2 33969 LPN-0,4D-2 33990 2 0.26 60.5 - - LPN-0,5C-2 33970 LPN-0,5D-2 33991 2 0.26 60.6 - - LPN-0,6C-2 33971 LPN-0,6D-2 33992 2 0.26 60.8 - - LPN-0,8C-2 33972 LPN-0,8D-2 33993 2 0.26 6

1 LPN-1B-2 34162 LPN-1C-2 33973 LPN-1D-2 33994 2 0.26 61.2 - - LPN-1,2C-2 33974 LPN-1,2D-2 33995 2 0.26 61.6 - - LPN-1,6C-2 33975 LPN-1,6D-2 33996 2 0.26 6


10 LPN-10B-2 33959 LPN-10C-2 33980 LPN-10D-2 34001 2 0.26 613 LPN-13B-2 33960 LPN-13C-2 33981 LPN-13D-2 34002 2 0.26 616 LPN-16B-2 33961 LPN-16C-2 33982 LPN-16D-2 34003 2 0.26 620 LPN-20B-2 33962 LPN-20C-2 33983 LPN-20D-2 34004 2 0.26 625 LPN-25B-2 33963 LPN-25C-2 33984 LPN-25D-2 34005 2 0.26 632 LPN-32B-2 33964 LPN-32C-2 33985 LPN-32D-2 34006 2 0.26 640 LPN-40B-2 33965 LPN-40C-2 33986 LPN-40D-2 34007 2 0.26 650 LPN-50B-2 33966 LPN-50C-2 33987 - - 2 0.26 663 LPN-63B-2 33967 LPN-63C-2 33988 - - 2 0.26 6


n

[A]





0.2 LPN-0,2B-3 34165 LPN-0,2C-3 34027 LPN-0,2D-3 34048 3 0.39 40.4 - - LPN-0,4C-3 34028 LPN-0,4D-3 34049 3 0.39 40.5 LPN-0,5B-3 34008 LPN-0,5C-3 34029 LPN-0,5D-3 34050 3 0.39 40.6 LPN-0,6B-3 34009 LPN-0,6C-3 34030 LPN-0,6D-3 34051 3 0.39 40.8 LPN-0,8B-3 34010 LPN-0,8C-3 34031 LPN-0,8D-3 34052 3 0.39 4

1 LPN-1B-3 34011 LPN-1C-3 34032 LPN-1D-3 34053 3 0.39 41.2 LPN-1,2B-3 34012 LPN-1,2C-3 34033 LPN-1,2D-3 34054 3 0.39 41.6 LPN-1,6B-3 34013 LPN-1,6C-3 34034 LPN-1,6D-3 34055 3 0.39 4


10 LPN-10B-3 34018 LPN-10C-3 34039 LPN-10D-3 34060 3 0.39 413 LPN-13B-3 34019 LPN-13C-3 34040 LPN-13D-3 34061 3 0.39 416 LPN-16B-3 34020 LPN-16C-3 34041 LPN-16D-3 34062 3 0.39 420 LPN-20B-3 34021 LPN-20C-3 34042 LPN-20D-3 34063 3 0.39 425 LPN-25B-3 34022 LPN-25C-3 34043 LPN-25D-3 34064 3 0.39 432 LPN-32B-3 34023 LPN-32C-3 34044 LPN-32D-3 34065 3 0.39 440 LPN-40B-3 34024 LPN-40C-3 34045 LPN-40D-3 34066 3 0.39 450 LPN-50B-3 34025 LPN-50C-3 34046 LPN-50D-3 34067 3 0.39 463 LPN-63B-3 34026 LPN-63C-3 34047 LPN-63D-3 34068 3 0.39 4

Miniature circuit breakers, 3+N-poleI

n

[A]





2 LPN-2B-3N 34069 - - - - 4 0.505 34 LPN-4B-3N 34070 - - - - 4 0.505 36 LPN-6B-3N 34071 LPN-6C-3N 34082 LPN-6D-3N 34093 4 0.505 38 LPN-8B-3N 34072 LPN-8C-3N 34083 LPN-8D-3N 34094 4 0.505 3

10 LPN-10B-3N 34073 LPN-10C-3N 34084 LPN-10D-3N 34095 4 0.505 313 LPN-13B-3N 34074 LPN-13C-3N 34085 LPN-13D-3N 34096 4 0.505 316 LPN-16B-3N 34075 LPN-16C-3N 34086 LPN-16D-3N 34097 4 0.505 320 LPN-20B-3N 34076 LPN-20C-3N 34087 LPN-20D-3N 34098 4 0.505 325 LPN-25B-3N 34077 LPN-25C-3N 34088 LPN-25D-3N 34099 4 0.505 332 LPN-32B-3N 34078 LPN-32C-3N 34089 LPN-32D-3N 34100 4 0.505 340 LPN-40B-3N 34079 LPN-40C-3N 34090 LPN-40D-3N 34101 4 0.505 350 LPN-50B-3N 34080 LPN-50C-3N 34091 - - 4 0.505 363 LPN-63B-3N 34081 LPN-63C-3N 34092 - - 4 0.505 3

Minia

B9


MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)DC miniature circuit breakers, 1-pole

In

[A]

Characteristic C Number Weight Package

Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]

2 LPN-DC-2C-1 34115 1 0.14 124 LPN-DC-4C-1 34116 1 0.14 126 LPN-DC-6C-1 34117 1 0.14 128 LPN-DC-8C-1 34118 1 0.14 12

10 LPN-DC-10C-1 34119 1 0.14 1213 LPN-DC-13C-1 34120 1 0.14 1216 LPN-DC-16C-1 34121 1 0.14 1220 LPN-DC-20C-1 34122 1 0.14 1225 LPN-DC-25C-1 34123 1 0.14 1232 LPN-DC-32C-1 34124 1 0.14 1240 LPN-DC-40C-1 34125 1 0.14 1250 LPN-DC-50C-1 34126 1 0.14 1263 LPN-DC-63C-1 34127 1 0.14 12

DC miniature circuit breakers, 2-poleI

n

[A]


Type Product codeof modules [kg] [pcs]

2 LPN-DC-2C-2 34141 2 0.27 64 LPN-DC-4C-2 34142 2 0.27 66 LPN-DC-6C-2 34143 2 0.27 68 LPN-DC-8C-2 34144 2 0.27 6

10 LPN-DC-10C-2 34145 2 0.27 613 LPN-DC-13C-2 34146 2 0.27 616 LPN-DC-16C-2 34147 2 0.27 620 LPN-DC-20C-2 34148 2 0.27 625 LPN-DC-25C-2 34149 2 0.27 632 LPN-DC-32C-2 34150 2 0.27 640 LPN-DC-40C-2 34151 2 0.27 650 LPN-DC-50C-2 34152 2 0.27 663 LPN-DC-63C-2 34153 2 0.27 6






Insulating barriers OD-LP-MP01 page B30

Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. page E52


Minia

B10


MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)Description

EASY CONNECTION ��Upper and lower combined terminal with a secured

screw makes it possible to connect interconnecting busbars with forks and conductors up to 25 mm2 by one screw.

��Plastic cover fi lls in the space under the terminal and thus prevents wrong insertion of conductor to the terminal.

��Top and bottom connection of circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.

��Bottom connection of circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers by the interconnecting busbar.

��Interconnecting busbars and terminal extensions see on page E52 - E57.

NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR��Unambiguously defi ne the state of the circuit breaker.

In [A] Colour

0.2 ÷ 1.6 �� black2 �� pink4 �� brown6 �� green8 �� light green10 �� red13 �� sandy16 �� grey20 �� blue25 �� yellow32 �� violet40 � black50 �� white63 �� copper

��Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser – it is

indelible.

Secured screw

For interconnecting busbars with forks

For conductors up to 25 mm2

Plastic cover

For interconnecting busbars wiht pins

NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT��Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated

current of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond

with the colours of the threaded fuse-links.

WITHDRAWAL OF CIRCUIT BREAKER FROM THE LINE

OF DEVICES ��Without interruption of adjacent current circuits.

��Provided by special top and bottom pawl.

��Withdrawal at top connection (circuit breakers, tumbler

power switches) and at bottom connection (circuit breakers

and residual current circuit breakers).


Lever down Lever up


Minia

B11


MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LPN UP TO 63 A (10 kA)

Type LPN LPN-DC

Standards EN 60898-1 EN 60898-2 1)

Approval marks

Number of poles 1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N 1, 2

Tripping characteristics B, C, D C

Rated current In 0.2 ÷ 63 A 2 ÷ 63 A

Rated operating voltage Ue 230/400 V a.c. / 60/220 V d.c. 2) 220/440 V d.c. 2)


253/440 V a.c. / 66/242 V d.c. 2) 242/484 V d.c. 2)


12 V a.c. / d.c. 12 V d.c.

Rated frequency fn 40 ÷ 60 Hz -

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898-1) Icn

10 kA -

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898-2) Icn - 10 kA (τ ≤ 5 ms)

Short-circuit service breaking capacity (EN 60898-2) Ics - 100 % I

cn

Endurance mechanical 20 000 operating cycles 20 000 operating cycles

electrical 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles

Energy limitation class 3 3


6 kV 6 kV

Overvoltage category (IEC 664-1) IV IV

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35 TH 35

Degree of protection IP20 IP20

Connection conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷ 10) mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5 ÷ 10) mm2

conductor Cu - flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2

interconnecting busbar IEC - thickness 2 mm 2 mm

torque 2 Nm 2 Nm

top or bottom connection yes yes 3)

Operating conditions ambient temperature -30 ÷ +55 °C -30 ÷ +55 °C

working position arbitrary arbitrary

seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 4) IEC 980:1993 4)

Specifi cations

1) DC tests2) Single-pole connection / two-pole connection3) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker in d.c. circuits4) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín


In

Z 1) P 1) Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2)

[A] [mΩ/pole] [W/pole] characteristic B characteristic C characteristic D

0.2 30650 1.25 230.9 128.3 72.20.4 7670 1.25 115.5 64.2 36.10.5 5440 1.35 92.4 51.3 28.90.6 3400 1.20 77.0 42.8 24.10.8 2130 1.35 57.8 32.1 18.01 1350 1.35 46.2 25.7 14.41.2 763 1.10 38.5 21.4 12.01.6 544 1.40 28.9 16.0 9.02 392 1.55 23.1 12.8 7.24 75.50 1.20 11.6 6.4 3.66 26.00 0.95 7.7 4.3 2.48 17.40 1.10 5.8 3.2 1.8

10 12.60 1.25 4.6 2.6 1.413 10.80 1.85 3.6 2.0 1.116 7.56 1.95 2.9 1.6 0.920 5.70 2.30 2.3 1.3 0.725 4.24 2.65 1.8 1.0 0.632 2.72 2.80 1.4 0.8 0.540 2.18 3.50 1.2 0.6 0.450 1.56 3.90 0.9 0.5 0.363 1.37 5.40 0.7 0.4 0.21) Average values per pole protected2) For TN network, U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker

Minia

B12



Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LPN

In

Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to + 60 °C [A] 1) Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2)

[A] -30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0.2 0.26 0.25 0.24 0.23 0.22 0.21 0.2 0.19 0.18 0.19 0.2 0.19 0.18 0.18 0.18 0.17 0.17 0.170.4 0.52 0.50 0.48 0.46 0.44 0.42 0.4 0.37 0.35 0.34 0.4 0.38 0.37 0.36 0.35 0.34 0.34 0.340.5 0.65 0.63 0.60 0.58 0.55 0.53 0.5 0.47 0.44 0.42 0.5 0.48 0.46 0.45 0.44 0.43 0.43 0.430.6 0.78 0.75 0.72 0.69 0.66 0.63 0.6 0.56 0.53 0.50 0.6 0.57 0.55 0.53 0.52 0.51 0.51 0.510.8 1.04 1 0.96 0.92 0.88 0.84 0.8 0.74 0.70 0.67 0.8 0.76 0.73 0.71 0.69 0.68 0.68 0.68

1 1.30 1.25 1.20 1.15 1.10 1.05 1 0.93 0.88 0.84 1 0.95 0.92 0.89 0.87 0.86 0.85 0.851.2 1.56 1.50 1.44 1.38 1.32 1.26 1.2 1.12 1.06 1.01 1.2 1.14 1.10 1.07 1.04 1.02 1.02 1.021.6 2.08 2 1.92 1.84 1.76 1.68 1.6 1.49 1.41 1.34 1.6 1.52 1.47 1.42 1.39 1.37 1.36 1.36

2 2.60 2.50 2.40 2.30 2.20 2.10 2 1.90 1.80 1.70 2 1.90 1.80 1.80 1.70 1.70 1.70 1.704 5.20 5 4.80 4.60 4.40 4.20 4 3.70 3.50 3.40 4 3.80 3.70 3.60 3.50 3.40 3.40 3.406 7.80 7.50 7.20 6.90 6.60 6.30 6 5.60 5.30 5 6 5.70 5.50 5.30 5.20 5.10 5.10 5.108 10.40 10 9.60 9.20 8.80 8.40 8 7.40 7 6.70 8 7.60 7.30 7.10 6.90 6.80 6.80 6.80

10 13 12.50 12 11.50 11 10.50 10 9.30 8.80 8.40 10 9.50 9.20 8.90 8.70 8.60 8.50 8.5013 16.90 16.30 15.60 15 14.30 13.70 13 12.10 11.40 10.90 13 12.40 11.90 11.60 11.30 11.20 11.10 11.1016 20.80 20 19.20 18.40 17.60 16.80 16 14.90 14.10 13.40 16 15.20 14.70 14.20 13.90 13.70 13.60 13.6020 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 18.60 17.60 16.80 20 19 18.30 17.80 17.30 17.10 17 1725 32.50 31.30 30 28.80 27.50 26.30 25 23.30 22 21 25 23.80 22.90 22.30 21.70 21.40 21.30 21.3032 41.60 40 38.40 36.80 35.20 33.60 32 29.80 28.20 26.90 32 30.40 29.30 28.50 27.70 27.30 27.20 27.2040 52 50 48 46 44 42 40 37.20 35.20 33.60 40 38 36.60 25.60 34.70 34.10 34 3450 65 62.50 60 57.50 55 52.50 50 46.50 44 42 50 47.50 45.80 44.50 43.40 42.70 42.50 42.5063 81.90 78.80 75.60 72.50 69.30 66.20 63 58.60 55.40 52.90 63 59.90 57.70 56.10 54.60 53.70 53.60 53.60

1) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic at reference temperature 30 °C 2) Valid for reference temperature 30 °C

Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics B with back-up fuses [kA] Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics C with back-up fuses [kA]

LPN PN, PV gG LPN PN, PV gGI

n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 I

n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

≤ 1.2 0.5 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 ≤ 1.2 0.5 6 10 10 10 10 10 101.6 0.5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10 1.6 0.5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10

2 x 1 6 10 10 10 10 10 2 x 1 6 10 10 10 10 104 x 1 1.5 6 10 10 10 10 4 x 1 1.5 6 10 10 10 106 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 10 6 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 108 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 10 8 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 10

10 x 1 1.5 2 5 10 10 10 10 x x 1.5 2 5 10 10 1013 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 10 13 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 1016 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 10 16 x x 1.5 2 2.5 6 10 1020 x x x 2 2.5 5 10 10 20 x x x x 2.5 5 10 1025 x x x x 2.5 5 10 10 25 x x x x 2.5 5 10 1032 x x x x x 3.5 6 10 32 x x x x x 3.5 6 1040 x x x x x 1 5 10 40 x x x x x x 5 1050 x x x x x x 3 6 50 x x x x x x 3 663 x x x x x x 3 6 63 x x x x x x x 6

x - without selectivity x - without selectivity

Selectivity of LPN miniature circuit breakers characteristics D with back-up fuses [kA]

LPN PN, PV gGI

n [A] 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100

≤ 1.2 0.5 6 10 10 10 10 10 101.6 0.5 5 10 10 10 10 10 10

2 x 1 6 10 10 10 10 104 x 1 1.5 6 10 10 10 106 x 1 1.5 2 6 10 10 108 x x 1.5 2 6 10 10 10

10 x x x 2 5 10 10 1013 x x x x 2.5 6 10 1016 x x x x 2.5 6 10 1020 x x x x x 5 10 1025 x x x x x x 10 1032 x x x x x x 6 1040 x x x x x x x 1050 x x x x x x x x63 x x x x x x x x

x - without selectivity

The time selectivity of particular combination up to the va-

lue of short-circuit current Ik

shown in the table is ensured

in case of short-circuit behind the LPN circuit breaker with

back-up fuse-link.

Which means that at short-circuit of particular combination

under the Ik

value only the circuit breaker actuates. In case

the short-circuit current value is bigger than Ik

, value then

also the back-up fuse-link actuates.

Example:

Circuit breaker LPN-16B-... actuates earlier than back-up fuse-

-link with rated current 50 A up to short-circuit current 2.5 kA.

LPN

PV, PN gG

Ik

Minia

B13



Dimensions

For protection of d.c. circuits it is possible to use LPE, LPN circuit

breakers and LPN-DC circuit breakers depending on voltage.

7017.5 35 52.5

~73

64

72

86~90

35

~4.5 44

~4. 5

45

LPN-..-1LPN-DC-..-1

LPN-..-1NLPN-..-2LPN-DC-..-2

LPN-..-3 LPN-..3N

Diagram

2

N1

N22 42 42

1 3 1 3 1 1

6

5 3

42

1

N26

N15

2

1 3

42

1

LPN-..-1 LPN-DC-..-2LPN-..-1N LPN-..-2 LPN-..-3 LPN-..-3N LPN-DC-..-1

Protection of DC circuits

Top connection Bottom connection Top connection Bottom connection

1-pole connection LPN-DC 2-pole connection LPN-DC

220 V / L+0 V / L-

220 V / L+ 0 V / L-440 V / L+

I

II

I

I

I

I

II

I

I

II

I

0 V / L-

440 V / L+0 V / L-

LPN

-DC

-...-1

LPN

-DC

-...-1

LPN

-DC

-...-2

LPN

-DC

-...-2

LoadSourceLoad Source

Load LoadSourceSource


Type of miniature Rated voltage Ue

circuit breaker ≤ 60 V d.c. ≤ 220 V d.c. ≤ 440 V d.c.

LPE, LPN-...-1 � - -LPE, LPN-...-2 � � -LPN-DC-...-1 1) � � -LPN-DC-...-2 1) � � �1) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker

� Possible to use

Source SourceLoad

Load Miniature circuit breaker

Load I

I

I

I

I

I

I I

Correct polarity connection of DC circuit breakers, loads etc. in the

circuit has to follow the direction of current fl ow in DC circuit that

is from (+) to (-).

Example of current fl ow according to

polarity is shown by the arrow:

1) Correct connection of devices

= equal direction of current fl ow on the devices

2) Wrong connection of devices

= contradictory current fl ow on the devices

The correct connection of devices (point 1) seems to be illogical due to connection of load terminal (+) and circuit breaker terminal (-). However, it is correct connection!!!

Minia

B14



Characteristics


current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In

.


surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In

.

��Characteristic D: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes high

current surges (transformers, 2-pole motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (12 ÷ 16) In

.



B, C, D


for t ≥ 1 h Int

= 1.13 In


t = 1.45 I

n

Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s (for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I3

= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s (for I

n > 32 A)


Characteristics I2t


B C D

Current I4 pro 0.1 s < t < 45 s (for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I4

= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s (for I

n > 32 A)

0.1 s < t < 15 s (for In

≤ 32 A)I

4 = 5 I

n0.1 s < t < 30 s (for In

> 32 A)

0.1 s < t < 4 s 1) (for In

≤ 32 A)I

4 = 10 I

n0.1 s < t < 8 s (for In

> 32 A)

Current I5 for t < 0.1 s I

5 = 5 I

nI

5 = 10 I

nI

5 = 20 I

n

1) for In

≤ 10 A is permissible that t < 8 s


1

2

5

10

30

60

120

min

.

10 000

5 000

1 000

500

100

50

10

5

1

0.5

0.1

0.01

0.001

0.002

0.006

1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80

B C D

B C D

x In

1.13

I n

1.45

I n

t [s]

v


LPN-..B-1

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

0.2 - 0.6 A

0.8 A

1- 1.2 A

1.6 - 2 A

4 A

6 A8 A10 A13 A

63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A

LPN-..C-1

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

0.2 - 0.6 A

0.8 A

1- 1.2 A

1.6 - 2 A

4 A

6 A

8 A10 A13 A

63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A

LPN-..D-1

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

0,2 - 0,6 A

0,8 A

1- 1,2 A

1,6 - 2 A

4 A

6 A8 A10 A13 A

63 A50 A40 A32 A25 A20 A16 A

Minia

B15

LST Miniature circuit breakers

MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS LST UP TO 125 A (10 kA)

��For building, commercial and industrial installations

up to 125 A 230/400 V a.c. and 440 V d.c.


and short-circuit.

��Tripping characteristics B, C, D according to EN 60898-1.

��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches,

undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting

busbars etc.

��Breaking capacity Icn

10 kA – to achieve higher Icn

(up to

120 kA) it is recommended to use cylindrical fuse-links

PV in fuse switch-disconnectors .

��Possibility of sealing in on or off position.

��N-pole of circuit breakers LST-...-3N contains neither

thermal nor short-circuit release, in switching on it

closes before and in switching off it opens after the

other poles.

��For circuit breakers LST-DC-... device polarity must be

always observed in connecting.

��Possibility to connect LST with pin interconnecting

busbars spacing 27 mm.


n

[A]





40 LST-40B-1 37440 LST-40C-1 37443 LST-40D-1 37446 1.5 0.21 350 LST-50B-1 37441 LST-50C-1 37444 LST-50D-1 37447 1.5 0.21 363 LST-63B-1 37442 LST-63C-1 37445 LST-63D-1 37448 1.5 0.21 380 LST-80B-1 37214 LST-80C-1 37217 LST-80D-1 37220 1.5 0.21 3

100 LST-100B-1 37215 LST-100C-1 37218 LST-100D-1 37221 1.5 0.21 3125 LST-125B-1 37216 LST-125C-1 37219 LST-125D-1 37222 1.5 0.21 3


n

[A]





40 LST-40B-3 37449 LST-40C-3 37452 LST-40D-3 37455 4.5 0.66 150 LST-50B-3 37450 LST-50C-3 37453 LST-50D-3 37456 4.5 0.66 163 LST-63B-3 37451 LST-63C-3 37454 LST-63D-3 37457 4.5 0.66 180 LST-80B-3 37223 LST-80C-3 37226 LST-80D-3 37229 4.5 0.66 1

100 LST-100B-3 37224 LST-100C-3 37227 LST-100D-3 37230 4.5 0.66 1125 LST-125B-3 37225 LST-125C-3 37228 LST-125D-3 37231 4.5 0.66 1

Miniature circuit breakers, 3+N-poleI

n

[A]





40 LST-40B-3N 37458 LST-40C-3N 37461 LST-40D-3N 37464 6 0.84 150 LST-50B-3N 37459 LST-50C-3N 37462 LST-50D-3N 37465 6 0.84 163 LST-63B-3N 37460 LST-63C-3N 37463 LST-63D-3N 37466 6 0.84 180 LST-80B-3N 37232 LST-80C-3N 37235 LST-80D-3N 37238 6 0.84 1

100 LST-100B-3N 37233 LST-100C-3N 37236 LST-100D-3N 37239 6 0.84 1125 LST-125B-3N 37234 LST-125C-3N 37237 LST-125D-3N 37240 6 0.84 1

DC miniature circuit breakers, 2-poleI

n

[A]


Type Product code


80 LST-DC-80C-2 37241 3 0.45 2100 LST-DC-100C-2 37242 3 0.45 2125 LST-DC-125C-2 37243 3 0.45 2

AccessoriesAuxiliary switches PS-LS-.. page B19

Shunt trips SV-LS-.. page B22

Undervoltage releases SP-LS-.. page B25

Interconnecting busbars S1L-27-.., S3L-27-.., S4L-27-.. page E52

Terminal extensions AS-50-S-AL01, CS-FH000-.., N3x10-FH000 page E57

Minia

B16



Description

Type LST LST-DC

Standards EN 60898-1 EN 60898-1

Approval marks

Number of poles 1, 3, 3+N 2

Tripping characteristics B, C, D C

Rated current In 40 ÷ 125 A 80, 100, 125 A

Rated operating voltage Ue 230/400 V a.c. / 48 V d.c. 1) 440 V d.c.


253/440 V a.c. / 52 V d.c. 1) 484 V d.c.


12 V a.c. / d.c. 12 V d.c.

Rated frequency fn 40 ÷ 60 Hz -

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity (EN 60898) Icn

10 kA -

Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity (EN 60947-2) Icu

- 10 kA (τ ≤ 5 ms)

Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity (EN 60947-2) Ics - 100 % I

cu

Endurance mechanical 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles

electrical 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles


6 kV 6 kV


Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35 TH 35


Connection conductor Cu - rigid (solid, stranded), flexible 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2

torque 3.5 Nm 3.5 Nm

top or bottom connection yes yes 2)

Operating conditions ambient temperature -30 ÷ +55 °C -30 ÷ +55 °C

working position arbitrary arbitrary

seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 3) IEC 980:1993 3)

Specifi cations

��Test push-button for check of the tripping mechanism

function.

In [A] Colour

40 �� black50 �� white63 �� copper80 �� silver

100 �� red125 �� yellow


In

[A]

Z 1)

[mΩ/pole]

P 1)

[VA/pole]

Max. impedance of fault loop Zs [Ω] 2)

characteristic B characteristic C characteristic D

40 2.31 3.69 1.16 0.64 0.36

50 1.73 4.32 0.93 0.51 0.28

63 1.42 5.63 0.73 0.40 0.23

80 0.91 5.79 0.57 0.32 0.18

100 0.80 8.03 0.46 0.26 0.14

125 0.61 9.46 0.36 0.20 0.111) Average values per pole protected2) For TN network, U = 230 V, break time up to 0.4 s; if the measured value exceeds the table value, use residual current circuit breaker.

1) Single-pole connection / two-pole connection2) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker in d.c. circuits3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

NOTICEABLE CONTACT STATE INDICATOR��Unambiguously defi ne the state of the circuit breaker.

Lever down Lever up


��Printing on circuit breaker is made by a laser - it is indelible.

NON-INTERCHANGEABILITY OF RATED CURRENT��Non-removable coloured sign according to the rated cu-

rrent of the circuit breaker. Target colours correspond with

the colours of the threaded fuse-links.

Minia

B17



For protection of d.c. circuits it is possible to use LST circuit breakers

and LST-DC circuit breakers depending on voltage.

Dimensions

Diagram


26.6 53.2 79.8 106.4

74

70

71.5

9045

60

445.5

1.7

LST-..-1 LST-DC-..-2 LST-..-3 LST-..-3N

2

1

LST-..1

3

42

1

LST-DC-..-2

3

42

1

6

5

LST-..3

3

42

1

N26

N15

LST-..-3N


2-pole connection LST-DC

LST-

DC

-...-2

LST-

DC

-...-2

Load Source

Load Source

I I

I

I I

I

I

I

440 V / L+0 V / L-

440 V / L+ 0 V / L-

Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers LST

In

[A]

Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -30 °C up to +60 °C [A] 1)

-30 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C 50 °C 60 °C

40 52.0 50.0 48.0 48.0 46.0 44.0 40 37.2 35.2 33.6

50 65.0 62.5 60.0 60.0 57.5 55.0 50 46.5 44.0 42.0

63 81.9 78.8 75.6 75.6 72.5 69.3 63 58.6 55.4 52.9

80 104.0 104.0 100.0 96.0 92.0 88.0 80 74.4 70.4 67.2

100 130.0 130.0 125.0 120.0 115.0 110.0 100 93.0 88.0 84.0

125 162.5 162.5 156.3 150.0 143.8 137.5 125 116.3 110.0 105.01) Valid for 1 pole and any characteristic, reference temperature 30 °C

Correction of rated currents of miniature circuit breakers installed side by side [A] 2)

1 2 3 4 5

40 38.00 37.00 36.00 35.20

50 47.50 46.25 45.00 44.00

63 59.85 58.28 56.70 55.44

80 76.00 74.00 72.00 70.40

100 95.00 92.50 90.00 88.00

125 118.75 115.63 112.50 110.002)

Valid for reference temperature 30 °C


Type of miniature circuit breaker Rated voltage Ue

≤ 48 V d.c. ≤ 440 V d.c.

LST-...-1 � -LST-DC-...-2 1) � �1) It is necessary to keep the polarity marked on the circuit breaker

� Possible to use

Correct polarity connection of DC circuit breakers, see page B13

Minia

B18



Characteristics


current surges (lighting and socket circuits etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (3 ÷ 5) In .


surges (light bulb groups, motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (6 ÷ 9) In

.

��Characteristic D: for protection of line of electrical circuits with equipment, which causes high

current surges (transformers, 2-pole motors etc.). The short-circuit release is set to (12 ÷ 16) In

.



B, C, D


for t ≥ 1 h ( for In

≤ 63 A) I

nt = 1.13 I

n Int

for t ≥ 2 h ( for In

> 63 A)

Conventional tripping current It for t < 1 h ( for I

n ≤ 63 A)

It = 1.45 I

n It for t < 2 h ( for I

n > 63 A)

Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s ( for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I3

= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s ( for I

n > 32 A)


Characteristics I2t

It

[As]

22

1 500

15 000

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

LST-..B-..

150 000

100 000

200 000

300 000

400 000500 000

I [A]p

63 A50 A

40 A

125 A

100 A80 A

1

2

5

10

30

60

120

min

.

10 000

5 000

1 000

500

100

50

10

5

1

0.5

0.1

0.01

0.001

0.002

0.006

B C D

1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80

x In

1.13

I n

1.45

I n

t [s]

v

B C DB C D



B C D

Current I4 for 0.1 s < t < 45 s ( for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I4

= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s ( for I

n > 32 A)

0.1 s < t < 15 s ( for In

≤ 32 A)I

4 = 5 I

n0.1 s < t < 30 s ( for In

> 32 A)

0.1 s < t < 4 s 1) ( for In

≤ 32 A)I

4 = 10 I

n0.1 s < t < 8 s ( for In

> 32 A)

Current I5 for t < 0.1s I

5 = 5 I

nI

5 = 10 I

nI

5 = 20 I

n

1) for In

≤ 10 A it is permissible that t < 8 s


It

[As]

22

1 500

15 000

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

LST-..C-..

150 000

100 000

200 000

300 000

400 000500 000

I [A]p

63 A50 A

40 A

125 A100 A80 A

It

[As]

22

1 500

15 000

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

LST-..D-..

150 000

100 000

200 000

300 000

400 000500 000

I [A]p

63 A50 A40 A

125 A

100 A

80 A

Minia

B19

Miniature circuit breakers

AUXILIARY AND RELATIVE SWITCHES

Auxiliary and relative switches PS-LP

��Accessories to: LPE, LPN, APN.

��Auxiliary and relative switches are designed for signalling

the position of the main contacts of circuit breakers LPE,

LPN and tumbler power switches APN in tripping:

� by releases or manually – i.e. in switching off by

overload, short-circuit, shunt trip or undervoltage

release and control lever. It is possible to use

contacts with this function (auxiliary contact)

to set switch SEL to position „A+A“ (resp. „A“ for

switching contact)

� only by releases – i.e. only in tripping by short-

circuit, overload, shunt trip or undervoltage

release. It is possible to use one contact with this

function (relative contact) to set switch SEL to

position „A+R“ (resp. „R“ for switching contact).

��Selection of auxiliary/relative contact function is perfor-

med by the rotary switch SEL on the side of the device.

��2 auxiliary and relative switches can be connected to one

miniature circuit breakers (tumbler power switch).

��They are suitable for application in SELV and PELV

circuits – suffi cient insulation is provided between

the circuit breaker (power tumbler switch) and

auxiliary and relative switches.

Arrangement of contacts 1) - position of switch SEL Type Product Number Weight PackageA+A 2) A+R 2) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

A 11 A 10 + R 10 PS-LP-110S 34260 0.5 0.05 1A 11 A 10 + R 10 PS-LP-110S-Au 3) 34261 0.5 0.05 1A 11 A 01 + R 01 PS-LP-110S-Y 34262 0.5 0.05 1A 20 A 10 + R 01 PS-LP-200S 34263 0.5 0.05 1A 02 A 01 + R 10 PS-LP-020S 34264 0.5 0.05 1A 001 R 001 PS-LP-001S 34265 0.5 0.045 1

1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts 2) Position A+A = contacts function in „auxiliary“ mode; position A+R = one contact is switched to „relative“ mode“ The choice of mode is done by rotary switch SEL on the side of the auxiliary switch3) Gold-plated contacts – suitable for switching of low output loads

Auxiliary switches PS-LS

��Accessories to: LST, AST.

��Can be used also with formerly produced types of circuit

breakers LSE, LSN.

��Auxiliary switches are used for position signalling of main

contacts of circuit breaker LST and tumbler power

switches AST in switching off by releases or manually

– i.e. in switching off by overload, short-circuit, shunt

trip or undervoltage release and control lever.

��They are suitable for application in SELV and PELV

circuits – suffi cient insulation is provided between

the circuit breaker (power tumbler switch) and

auxiliary and relative switches.

Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

11 PS-LS-1100 35664 0.5 0.043 111 PS-LS-1100-Au 2) 35665 0.5 0.043 121 PS-LS-2100 35666 0.5 0.049 121 PS-LS-2100-Au 2) 35667 0.5 0.049 1

1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Gold-plated contacts – suitable for switching of low output loads

Minia

B20


A+A A+R

SEL

PS-LP-110SPS-LP-110S-Au

PS-LP-020SPS-LP-110S-Y PS-LP-200S PS-LP-001S

14 22

13 21

SEL A+A� SEL A+A� SEL A+A� SEL A+A� SEL A�

11

12

23

24

2313

14 24

11 21

12 22

11

12 14

Change-over switch SEL in position A+A


Type PS-LP-.. PS-LS-..

Standards EN 60947-5-1, EN 62019 EN 60947-5-1

Approval marks

Arrangement of contacts 1) 2) A11/A10+R10, A11/A01+R01, A20/A10+R01,

A02/A01+R10, A001/R001

11, 21

Rated operating voltage / current Ue / I

eAC-12 230 V a.c. / 6 A 230 V a.c. / 6 A

AC-13 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 -

AC-15 230 V a.c. / 3 A 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A

DC-13 220 V d.c. / 0.55 A 220 V d.c. / 1 A


4 kV 4 kV

Mechanical endurance 20 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles

Electrical endurance 4 000 operating cycles 4 000 operating cycles

Mounting on the right side of the device on the right side of the device


Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2

Conductor flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2

Torque 0.8 Nm 0.8 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes yes

Operating conditions

Ambient temperature -30 ÷ 55 °C -30 ÷ 55 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary

Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 3) IEC 980:1993 3)

1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) A=auxiliary contact, R=relative contact3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Specifi cations

Dimensions

Diagram

8.75 5.5

70

44

60

93 90 45

PS-LS-..PS-LP-110SPS-LP-110S-..PS-LP-200SPS-LP-020S

PS-LP-001S

33

23

11

12

24

348.75

12.75

86

44

72

45

8.75

12.75

12 14

1311

2321 9391

942422 92 9214

9111

9412

64.2

Minia

B21



Diagram

Installation of auxiliary switch on miniature circuit breaker (tumbler

switch)

A+AA+R

SEL

SEL A+� R SEL A+� R SEL A+� R SEL A+� R SEL � R

13

14

93

94

11

12

91

92

9113

14 92

11 93

12 94 92

91

94

PS-LP-110SPS-LP-110S-Au

PS-LP-020SPS-LP-110S-Y PS-LP-200S PS-LP-001SChange-over switch SEL in position A+R

PS-LP-..

1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the

device are in OFF position.

2. Insert the lower fastening catch in the device recess.

3. Press the auxiliary switch to the device so that the upper

fastening latch of the auxiliary switch snaps in the

device recess.

4. Check correct function by switching.

PS-LS-..

1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the device

are in ON position.

2. From the right slide the longer shaft in the control lever

of the device and shorter one in the hole of the switching

system of the device

3. From the right slide the auxiliary switch on the device so

that one shaft interconnects control levers and the other the

switching systems.

4. Press the auxiliary switch to the device and snap the side

fastening clamps of the auxiliary switch in the device recess.


OFF

LPNLPEAPN PS-LP

max 2x

OFF

1 1

2

3

2

PS-LS

LST, AST

ON

13.5

9.8

ON

34 12

33 11

PS-LS-1100

34 24 12

33 23 11

PS-LS-2100

Minia

B22


SHUNT TRIPS

Shunt trips SV-LP


��For tripping the circuit breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler

power switch APN by applied voltage.

��It contains auxiliary make contact, which can be used

for position signalling of the main contacts of circuit

breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler power switch APN.

Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight PackageU

ccode of modules [kg] [pcs]

12 ÷ 60 V a.c. / d.c. SV-LP-X060 34325 1 0.125 1110 ÷ 415 V a.c. / 110 ÷ 220 V d.c. SV-LP-X400 34326 1 0.125 1

Shunt trips SV-LS



breakers LSE, LSN.

��For tripping the circuit breaker LST and tumbler power

switch AST by applied voltage between 70 % and

110 % Uc .

��It contains make contact (version SV-LS-....-1010 make

and break), which can be used for position signalling

of the main contacts of circuit breaker LST and

tumbler power switch AST.

Rated voltage Arrangement Type Product Number Weight PackageU

cof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

24 V a.c. / d.c. 10 SV-LS-X024-1000 35695 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X024-1010 35696 1 0.12 1



230 V a.c. / 220 V d.c. 10 SV-LS-X230-1000 35701 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X230-1010 35702 1 0.12 1

400 V a.c. / 440 V d.c. 10 SV-LS-X400-1000 35703 1 0.12 1101 SV-LS-X400-1010 35704 1 0.12 1

1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Minia

B23


SHUNT TRIPS

Type SV-LP-.. SV-LS-..


Approval marks

Mounting on the left side of the device on the left side of the device


Control circuit (coil)

Rated voltage Uc

12 ÷ 60 V a.c. / d.c. 24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c.

110 ÷ 415 V a.c. / 110 ÷ 220 V d.c. 24, 48, 110, 220, 440 V d.c.

Rated frequency fn

40 ÷ 60 Hz 40 ÷ 60 Hz

Break time max. 15 ms 10 ms

Contact

Arrangement of contacts 1) 10 10, 101


eAC-1 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A

AC-15 230 V a.c. / 2 A 230 V a.c. / 2 A

DC-1 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A



Connection

Conductor – rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2 0.75 ÷ 4 mm2

Conductor – flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2







1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Specifi cations

Dimensions

17.5

26.1 71.5

70

4590

5.5

60

44

SV-LS-..SV-LP-..

24

22

21

C2

C114

17.5

21.45

86

44

72

45

C2

14

C1

64.2

Diagram

1414

C2C2 C1C1

14 21

C2C1 22 24

SV-LS-..-1000SV-LP-.. SV-LS-..-1010

Minia

B24


SHUNT TRIPS

Installation of shunt trip on circuit breaker (tumbler switch)

SV-LP-..

1. At mounting the levers of the shunt trip and of the devi-

ce are in OFF position.


3. Press the shunt trip to the device so that the upper faste-

ning latch of the shunt trip snaps in the device recess.


SV-LS-..

1. At mounting the levers of the shunt trip and of the device

are in OFF position.


of the shunt trip and shorter one in the hole of the switching

system of the shunt trip.

3. From the right slide the device on the shunt trip so that

one shaft interconnects control levers and the other the

switching systems.

4. Press the device to the shunt trip and snap the side fastening

clamps of the shunt trip in the device recess.


OFF

OFF

1

22

3

1

LST, AST

SV-LS

OFF

OFF

13.5

9.8

Minia

B25


UNDERVOLTAGE RELEASES

Undervoltage releases SP-LP


��For tripping the circuit breaker LPE, LPN and tumbler

power switch APN at loss of voltage as well as at gra-

dual decrease of voltage between 70 % and 35 % Uc .

��For elimination of closing of circuit breaker LPE, LPN and

tumbler power switch APN, if voltage is lower than 35 %

Uc (switching is possible at voltage higher than 85 % U

c).

��They are often used for protection against device restart

following power blackout.

��Design with 0.2 s, resp. 0.4 s delay for prevention of un-

wanted tripping at short-time power blackout.

Undervoltage releases SP-LS



breakers LSE, LSN.

��For tripping the circuit breaker LST and tumbler power

switch AST at loss of voltage as well as at gradual dec-

rease of voltage between 70 % and 35 % Uc .

��For elimination of circuit breaker LST and tumbler po-

wer switch AST, if voltage is lower than 35 % Uc

(swit-

ching is possible at voltage higher than 85 % Uc).

��They are often used for protection against device restart

following power blackout.

��Undervoltage releases SP-LS-....-1010 contain in addi-

tion an auxiliary switch with make and break-make

contact for position signalling of the main contacts

of circuit breaker LST or tumbler power switch AST.

Rated voltage Delay Type Product Number Weight PackageU


24 V a.c. - SP-LP-A024 34327 1 0.125 148 V a.c. - SP-LP-A048 34328 1 0.125 1110 V a.c. - SP-LP-A110 34329 1 0.130 1230 V a.c. - SP-LP-A230 34330 1 0.125 1230 V a.c. 0.4 s SP-LP-A230-T004 34331 1 0.130 1400 V a.c. - SP-LP-A400 34332 1 0.130 124 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D024-Y004 34333 1 0.130 148 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D048-Y004 34334 1 0.130 1110 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D110-Y004 34335 1 0.130 1220 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D220-Y004 34336 1 0.125 1400 V d.c. 0 s or 0.2 s 1) SP-LP-D400-Y004 34337 1 0.125 1

Rated voltage Arrangement Type Product Number Weight PackageU

cof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

24 V a.c. - SP-LS-A024 35944 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A024-1010 35945 1 0.12 1

48 V a.c. - SP-LS-A048 35946 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A048-1010 35947 1 0.12 1

110 V a.c. - SP-LS-A110 35948 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A110-1010 35949 1 0.12 1

230 V a.c. - SP-LS-A230 35950 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A230-1010 35951 1 0.12 1

400 V a.c. - SP-LS-A400 35952 1 0.12 1101 SP-LS-A400-1010 35953 1 0.12 1


1) Delay is activated by interconnection of terminals 1, 2

Minia

B26



Type SP-LP-.. SP-LS-..


Approval marks

Mounting on the left side of the device on the left side of the device



Rated voltage Uc

24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c. 24, 48, 110, 230, 400 V a.c.

24, 48, 110, 220, 400 V d.c.

Consumption 2.6 W 2.5 W

Rated frequency fn

40 ÷ 60 Hz 40 ÷ 60 Hz

Break time max. 45 ms 2) 25 ms

Contact

Arrangement of contacts 1) - 10, 101


eAC-1 - 230 V a.c. / 4 A or 400 V a.c. / 2 A

AC-15 - 230 V a.c. / 2 A

DC-1 - 220 V d.c. / 0,5 A

Mechanical endurance - 10 000 operating cycles

Electrical endurance - 4 000 operating cycles

Connection









1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) The stated time is valid for undelayed undervoltage releases3) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Specifi cations

Dimensions

Diagram

17.5

26.1 71.5

70

4590

5.5

60

44

SP-LS-..SP-LP-..

24

22

21

13

D1D2

17.5

21.45

86

44

72

45

D2

2

D1

1

64.2

D2

D1

U<

SP-LS-

D2

D1

U<

SP-LP-A..

D2 2

D1 1

U<

SP-LS-D..

D2 21

13D1

U<

22 24

SP-LS-..-1010

Minia

B27



Installation of undervoltage release on circuit breaker (tumbler switch)

SP-LP-..

1. At mounting the levers of undervoltage release and

of the device are in OFF position.


3. Press the undervoltage release to the device so that the

upper fastening latch of the undervoltage release snaps

in the device recess.


SP-LS-..

1. At mounting the levers of undervoltage release and of the



undervoltage releases and shorter one in the hole of the

switching system of the undervoltage release.

3. From the right slide the device on the undervoltage release

so that one shaft interconnects control levers and the other

the switching systems.

4. Press the device to the undervoltage release and snap the

side fastening latches of the undervoltage release in the

device recess.


OFF

OFF

1

22

3

1

LST, AST

SP-LS

OFF

OFF

13.5

9.8

Minia

B28

OD-LP-VU01 Miniature circuit breakers

LOCKING INSERT


��For safe locking of the control lever in off or on position.

��The protective function of the circuit breaker is

functional even in locked position.

��Maximum diameter of lock rod – 5 mm.

��The lock is not included in the package.

Type Product Weight Package code [kg] [pcs]

OD-LP-VU01 37287 0.003 1

Dimensions

64.2 10.517.5

OD-LP-VU01

Mounting of locking insert on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch)

1 2 3

4 Position switched of Position switched on

Minia

B29

OD-LP-VP01 Miniature circuit breakers

SEALING INSERT


��For covering and sealing of terminal screws.

Type Product Weight Packagecode [kg] [pcs]

OD-LP-VP01 37289 0.004 1

Mounting of sealing insert on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch)

1

2 3

Minia

B30

OD-LP-MP01 Miniature circuit breakers

INSULATING BARRIERS


��For additional increase of surface distances between

individual poles of the circuit breaker LPE, LPN or

tumbler power switch APN.

��1 set contains 3 pieces.

Dimensions

15

1

21.2

43.8

OD-LP-MP01

Type Product Weight Packagecode [kg] [number of sets]

OD-LP-MP01 37288 0.002 1

Mounting of insulation barrier on the circuit breaker (tumbler switch)

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS

Minia

C

��Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent

protection OLE (6 kA).................................................................................................................. C2

��Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent

protection OLI (10 kA)................................................................................................................. C6

��Accessories for OLE, OLI........................................................................................................... C12

��Residual current circuit breakers OFE (6 kA)............................................................... C14

��Residual current circuit breakers OFI (10 kA).............................................................. C17

��Accessories for OFE, OFI............................................................................................................ C22

��Basic terms, symbols and break times........................................................................... C24

Minia

C2

OLE Residual current circuit breakers

��The device is a combination of residual current circuit

breaker and circuit breaker.

��For building, housing and similar installations up to 16 A,

230 V a.c.

��For protection:

– against dangerous contact with live parts (IΔn

≤ 30 mA)

– against dangerous contact with dead parts

– against fi re

– against overload

– against short-circuit (breaking capacity Icn

= 6 kA)

��Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 61009-1.

��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switch

PS-LV-1100 on the right side of the device.

Accessories to OLE

Auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100-K page C12

Interconnecting busbars S2L-... page E52

Terminal extensions AS-25-S, AS-50-S-AL01 page E57

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLE (6 kA)

6 0003

IΔn

In


[mA] [A] Type Productcode Type Product

codeof modules [kg] [pcs]

306 OLE-6B-1N-030AC 38313 OLE-6C-1N-030AC 38320 2 0.25 1

10 OLE-10B-1N-030AC 38314 OLE-10C-1N-030AC 38321 2 0.25 116 OLE-16B-1N-030AC 38315 OLE-16C-1N-030AC 38322 2 0.25 1

Type OLE


Approval marks

Number of poles 2

Tripping characteristics B, C

Type AC

Rated current In 6 ÷ 16 A

Rated residual current IΔn 30 mA

Rated operating voltage Ue 230 V a.c.

Min. operating voltage 1) Umin 100 V a.c.

Max. operating voltage Umax 255 V a.c.

Rated frequency fn 50 ÷ 60 Hz

Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn 6 kA

Rated residual making and breaking capacity IΔm 6 kA

Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp 6 kV

Mechanical endurance 10 000 operating cycles

Electrical endurance 10 000 operating cycles

Energy limitation class 3


Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35

Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2)

Conductor flexible with a sleeve 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2)

Torque 2.5÷ 3 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes


Ambient temperature -5 ÷ 40 °C

Working position arbitrary1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) For detailed connection of conductors see the table on page C5

Specifi cations

Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type AC� They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).

Minia

C3



Diagram

1

2 N

N

Dimensions

OLE

36

90

44

64

70

7

73.3

9045

Characteristic B Characteristic CI

n [A] L-Pole N-Pole Power loss L-Pole N-Pole Power loss

Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P [W] Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P [W]

6 72 2.1 2.7 52 2.1 1.910 15.4 2.1 1.8 13.4 2.1 1.616 9.6 2.1 3 8.7 2.1 2.8

Internal impedance Z and powers losses P

In

Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -10 °C up to + 40 °C [A] 2)

[A] -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C

6 6.8 6.7 6.4 6.2 6 5.710 11.4 11.2 10.7 10.4 10 9.5

16 18.2 17.9 17.1 16.6 16 15.22) Reference temperature: 30 °C

Correction of rated currents

OLE

Minia

C4



Characteristics




.




.



B, C


for t ≥ 1 h Int

= 1.13 In


t = 1.45 I

n

Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s and I

n ≤ 32 A

I3

= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s and I

n > 32 A



B C

Current I4 for 0.1 s < t < 45 s (for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I4

= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s (for I

n > 32 A)

0.1 s < t < 15 s (for In

≤ 32 A)I

4 = 5 I

n0.1 s < t < 30 s (for In

> 32 A)


5 = 5 I

nI

5 = 10 I

n


1

2

5

10

30

60

120

min

.

10 000

5 000

1 000

500

100

50

10

5

1

0.5

0.1

0.01

0.001

0.002

0.006

1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80

B C

B C

x In

1.13

I n

1.45

I n

t[s

]v

At ambient temperature +30 °C

Characteristics I2t

OLE-..B-..

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

1000

0

6 A

10 A

16 A

OLE-..C-..

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

1500

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

1000

0

6 A

10 A

16 A

Minia

C5



Connection of conductors and interconnecting busbars

Number of connected conductors Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve

Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 2

1 conductor 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

2 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

3 conductors 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 2,5 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) * 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

4 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

Connection range

Terminal system

��Possibility of connection:

- conductors of various cross-sections

- up to 4 conductors in the terminal

- conductor of cross-section up to 35 mm2

��Design: two levels of terminals with a fi xed barrier between them.

��Connection: each level enables connection of both the conductor

and interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars with pins, type

„S“ – see page E52). This is possible from both sides of the device. For

connection range see the table below.

* Valid only for stranded conductor, for solid conductor the max cross-section is 16 mm2

Level 1

Barrier

Level 2

Advantages

��Easy connection and check of conductors at simultaneous

connection of interconnecting busbar – the busbar does not cover the

conductor connecting place.

Minia

C6

OLI Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA) ��The device is a combination of residual current circuit

breaker and circuit breaker.


up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.



≤ 30 mA)


– against fi re

– against overload

– against short-circuit (breaking capacity Icn

= 10 kA)

��Tripping characteristics B, C according to EN 61009-1.

��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switch

PS-LV-1100 on the right side of the device.

Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection. type AC� They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).

IΔn

In


[mA] [A] Type Product code Type Product


30

6 OLI-6B-1N-030AC 38271 OLI-6C-1N-030AC 38278 2 0.25 110 OLI-10B-1N-030AC 38272 OLI-10C-1N-030AC 38279 2 0.25 116 OLI-16B-1N-030AC 38273 OLI-16C-1N-030AC 38280 2 0.25 120 OLI-20B-1N-030AC 38274 OLI-20C-1N-030AC 38281 2 0.25 125 OLI-25B-1N-030AC 38275 OLI-25C-1N-030AC 38282 2 0.25 132 OLI-32B-1N-030AC 38276 OLI-32C-1N-030AC 38283 2 0.25 140 OLI-40B-1N-030AC 38277 OLI-40C-1N-030AC 38284 2 0.25 1

300

6 - - OLI-6C-1N-300AC 38285 2 0.25 110 - - OLI-10C-1N-300AC 38286 2 0.25 116 - - OLI-16C-1N-300AC 38287 2 0.25 120 - - OLI-20C-1N-300AC 38288 2 0.25 125 - - OLI-25C-1N-300AC 38289 2 0.25 132 - - OLI-32C-1N-300AC 38290 2 0.25 140 - - OLI-40C-1N-300AC 38291 2 0.25 1

10 0003

Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type A� They react to both sine-wave residual current and pulsating direct residual current (type A).

IΔn

In


[mA] [A] Type Product code Type Product


30

6 OLI-6B-1N-030A 38292 OLI-6C-1N-030A 38299 2 0.25 110 OLI-10B-1N-030A 38293 OLI-10C-1N-030A 38300 2 0.25 116 OLI-16B-1N-030A 38294 OLI-16C-1N-030A 38301 2 0.25 120 OLI-20B-1N-030A 38295 OLI-20C-1N-030A 38302 2 0.25 125 OLI-25B-1N-030A 38296 OLI-25C-1N-030A 38303 2 0.25 132 OLI-32B-1N-030A 38297 OLI-32C-1N-030A 38304 2 0.25 140 OLI-40B-1N-030A 38298 OLI-40C-1N-030A 38305 2 0.25 1

300

6 - - OLI-6C-1N-300A 38306 2 0.25 110 - - OLI-10C-1N-300A 38307 2 0.25 116 - - OLI-16C-1N-300A 38308 2 0.25 120 - - OLI-20C-1N-300A 38309 2 0.25 125 - - OLI-25C-1N-300A 38310 2 0.25 132 - - OLI-32C-1N-300A 38311 2 0.25 140 - - OLI-40C-1N-300A 38312 2 0.25 1

10 0003

-25

Minia

C7


RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS WITH OVERCURRENT PROTECTION OLI (10 kA)

IΔn

In


[mA] [A] Type Productcode Type Product


30

10 OLI-10B-1N-030AC-G 38328 OLI-10C-1N-030AC-G 38333 2 0.25 116 OLI-16B-1N-030AC-G 38329 OLI-16C-1N-030AC-G 38334 2 0.25 120 OLI-20B-1N-030AC-G 38330 OLI-20C-1N-030AC-G 38335 2 0.25 125 OLI-25B-1N-030AC-G 38331 OLI-25C-1N-030AC-G 38336 2 0.25 1

��They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).

��Special residual current circuit breakers which reduce

the number of undesirable releases.

��It is recommended to install them before the equipment

causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents – heavy

induction motors, large heating bodies, interference

suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.

��Surge resistance: 3 kA (8/20 μs).

��Release delay: 10 ms.

Residual current circuit breakers with overcurrent protection, type AC-G

Accessories to OLI

Auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100-K page C12

Interconnecting busbars S2L-... page E52

Terminal extensions AS-25-S, AS-50-AL01 page E57

10 0003

G-25

Minia

C8



Specifi cations

Type OLI-..AC OLI-..A OLI-..AC-G

Standards EN 61009-1 EN 61009-1 EN 61009-1

Approval marks

Number of poles 2 2 2

Tripping characteristics B, C B, C B, C

Type AC A AC-G

Rated current In

6 ÷ 40 A 6 ÷ 40 A 10 ÷ 25 A

Rated residual current IΔn

30, 300 mA 30, 300 mA 30 mA

Rated operating voltage Ue

230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Min. operating voltage 1) Umin

100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c.


255 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 255 V a.c.

Rated frequency fn

50 ÷ 60 Hz 50 ÷ 60 Hz 50 ÷ 60 Hz

Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity Icn

10 kA 10 kA 10 kA

Rated residual making and breaking capacity IΔm

10 kA 10 kA 10 kA


6 kV 6 kV 6 kV

Release delay - - 10 ms

Mechanical endurance 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles

Electrical endurance 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles 10 000 operating cycles

Energy limitation class 3 3 3

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35

Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2 2)

Conductor flexible with a sleeve 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2) 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2 2)

Torque 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes yes yes


Ambient temperature -5 ÷ 40 °C -25 ÷ 40 °C -25 ÷ 40 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) For detailed connection of conductors see the table on page C11

G

Characteristic B Characteristic C

L-Pole N-Pole Power loss L-Pole N-Pole Power lossI

n [A] Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P

v [W] Z [mΩ] Z [mΩ] P

v [W]

6 72 2.1 2.7 52 2.1 1.910 15.4 2.1 1.8 13.4 2.1 1.6

16 9.6 2.1 3 8.7 2.1 2.8

20 7.1 2.1 3.7 6.1 2.1 3.3

25 6.1 2.1 5.1 6 2.1 5.1

32 4.1 1.5 5.7 4.1 1.5 5.7

40 3.4 1.5 7.8 3.4 1.5 7.8

Internal impedance Z and powers losses P

In

Correction of rated currents for ambient temperature -25°C up to + 40°C [A] 2)

[A] -25 °C -20 °C -10 °C 0 °C 10 °C 20 °C 30 °C 40 °C

6 7.20 7.08 6.8 6.7 6.4 6.2 6 5.710 12 11.80 11.4 11.2 10.7 10.4 10 9.5

16 19.20 18.88 18.2 17.9 17.1 16.6 16 15.2

20 24 23.60 22.8 22.4 21.4 20.8 20 19

25 30 29.50 28.5 28 26.8 26 25 23.8

32 38.40 37.76 36.5 35.8 34.2 33.3 32 30.4

40 48 47.20 45.6 44.8 42.8 41.6 40 382) Reference temperature 30 °C

Correction of rated currents

Minia

C9



Diagram

1

2 N

N

OLI

Dimensions

OLI

36

90

44

64

70

7

73.3

9045

Minia

C10


Characteristics




.




.



B, C


for t ≥ 1 h Int

= 1.13 In


t = 1.45 I

n

Current I3 for 1 s < t < 60 s and I

n ≤ 32 A

I3

= 2.55 In 1 s < t < 120 s and I

n > 32 A



B C

Current I4 for 0.1 s < t < 45 s (for I

n ≤ 32 A)

I4

= 3 In 0.1 s < t < 90 s (for I

n > 32 A)

0.1 s < t < 15 s (for In

≤ 32 A)I

4 = 5 I

n0.1 s < t < 30 s (for In

> 32 A)


5 = 5 I

nI

5 = 10 I

n


Characteristics I2t

OLI-..B-..

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

6 A

10 A

25, 32, 40 A

16, 20 A


1

2

5

10

30

60

120

min

.

10 000

5 000

1 000

500

100

50

10

5

1

0.5

0.1

0.01

0.001

0.002

0.006

1 2 3 4 6 8 10 20 30 40 60 80

B C

B C

x In

1.13

I n

1.45

I n

t[s

]v

At ambient temperature +30 °C

OLI-..C-..

I [A]p

It

[As]

22

20

30

4050

70

100

150

1 500

15 000

200

300

400500

700

1 000

2 000

5 000

7 000

3 000

4 000

10 000

20 000

30 000

40 00050 000

90 000

70 000

100

0

150

0

800

900

200

0

300

0

400

0

500

0

600

0

700

08

000

900

010

000

2000

0

6 A

10 A

25, 32, 40 A

16, 20 A

Minia

C11




Number of connected conductors Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve

Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 2

1 conductor 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

2 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 6 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

3 conductors 1x ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 2,5 mm2)

1x ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1x ( ≤ 16 mm2)

4 conductors 2x ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2x ( ≤ 4 mm2)

Connection range

Terminal system

Advantages

��Design: two levels of terminals with a fi xed barrier between them.

��Connection: each level enables connection of both the conductor and

interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars with pins, type „S“ – see

page E52). This is possible from both sides of the device. For connection range

see the table below.

��Safety: the terminals are equipped with sliding plastic caps, which eff ectively

increase protection against dangerous contact with live parts.

��Possibility of connection:

- conductors of various cross sections

- up to 4 conductors in the terminal

- conductor of cross-section up to 35 mm2

��Easy connection and check of conductors at simultaneous connection

of interconnecting busbar – the busbar does not cover the conductor

connecting place.

��Mounting/demounting on/from „DIN“ rails

��New system of latches enables:

- very quick mounting and demounting by hand, without any tool needed.

- withdrawal/replacement of the residual current circuit breaker from a row of devices

interconnected by the interconnecting busbar up or down without interruption

of adjacent circuit or removal of the busbar.

Level 1

Barrier

Level 2

Minia

C12

Residual current circuit breakers

Type PS-LV-..

Standards EN 60947-5-1, EN 62019

Approval marks

Arrangement of contacts 1) 11


e AC-13400 V a.c. / 2 A

230 V a.c. / 6 A

AC-14400 V a.c. / 2 A

230 V a.c. / 6 A

DC-13

220 V d.c. / 1 A

110 V d.c. / 1 A

60 V d.c. / 3 A

24 V d.c. / 6 A



Mounting on the right side of the device


Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2

Conductor flexible 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2

Torque 0.5 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes



Working position arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

ACCESSORIES FOR OLE, OLI

��Installation: on the right side of the residual current

circuit breaker with overload protection.

��For signalling the position of contacts of residual current

circuit breakers with overload protection.

Auxiliary switch

Specifi cations

Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts code of modules [kg] [pcs]

111) PS-LV-1100-K 38938 0.5 0.05 1 1)Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Auxiliary switch with handle adapter

Minia

C13


ACCESSORIES FOR OLE, OLI

Diagram

13 21

14 22

PS-LV-1100Dimensions

90

9 6

45 90

73.3

44

64

68.5

PS-LV-1100

Installation of auxiliary switch

OLI, OLE PS-LV-1100

OD-OL-NR01

OLI, OLE PS-LV-1100max. 2x

12

4

5

5

5

5

5

3

3

PS-LV-1100

1. At mounting the levers of auxiliary switch and of the


2. Slide the handle adapter on the control lever of the

device from the right.

3. Swing away the fastening tapes.

4. Slide the auxiliary switch on the device from the right

to interconnect the shaft of the control lever and the

switching system.

5. Secure the fastening tapes.


Minia

C14

OFE Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA) ��They react to sine-wave residual current (type AC).



≤ 30 mA)


– against fi re or short-circuit in reduced insulation

capacity of electrical equipment (IΔn

≤ 300 mA)

��Possibility of additional mounting of auxiliary switches

PS-OF-1100 on the right side of the device.

��Surge current resistance up to 1 kA (8/20 μs).

��Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPE

(LPN) by means of interconnecting busbars.

��N-pole of residual current circuit breakers in switching

on it closes before and in switching off it opens after

the other poles.

Accessories to OFE

Auxiliary switch PS-OF-1100 page C22

Interconnecting busbars G2L-1000-16, G4L-1000-16 page E52

Terminal extensions AS-25-G, AS-25-S page E57

6 000Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC� Standard type for common use in building and housing installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.

IΔn

In

Type Product Number Weight Package

[mA] [A] code of modules [kg] [pcs]

30 25 OFE-25-2-030AC 35299 2 0.28 130 40 OFE-40-2-030AC 35301 2 0.28 1300 25 OFE-25-2-300AC 35300 2 0.28 1300 40 OFE-40-2-300AC 35302 2 0.28 1

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC

� Standard type for common use in building and housing installations up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c.

IΔn

In



3025 OFE-25-4-030AC 35303 4 0.52 140 OFE-40-4-030AC 35305 4 0.52 163 OFE-63-4-030AC 35307 4 0.52 1

30040 OFE-40-4-300AC 35306 4 0.52 163 OFE-63-4-300AC 35308 4 0.52 1

Minia

C15


RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA)

Type OFE-..-2-.. OFE-..-4-..

Standards EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755

Approval marks

Number of poles 2 4

Type AC AC

Rated current In

25, 40 A 25, 40, 63 A


30, 300 mA 30, 300 mA


230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c.


100 V a.c. 100 V a.c.


240 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c.

Rated frequency fn

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Rated conditional short-circuit current: 3) Inc

with back-up fuse In ≤ 63 A gG 6 kA -

with back-up fuse In ≤ 100 A gG - 6 kA

with back-up miniature circuit breaker LPE, LPN, L ST with In max. 1:1 6 kA 6 kA

Rated making and breaking capacity Im

500 A 800 A

Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA

Release delay - -

Mechanical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles

EElectrical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles


Connection

Conductor 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2

Torque 3 Nm 3 Nm






1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín3) Rated conditional short-circuit current relates to short-circuit protection. It is also possible to protect residual current circuit breakers against overload by circuit breaker and fuse-link. In this case I

n of MCB has to be

equal or lower than In of RCCB (In MCB ≤ In RCCB) a I

n and In of fuse-link has to be by one degree lower than I

n of RCCB (In of fuse-link by one degree lower ≤ In RCCB)

Specifi cations

Dimensions

36 72

64

447

9045

OFE-..-2-.. OFE-..4-..

Powers losses POFE-...-2-... OFE-...-4-...

In

[A]

IΔn

[A]

P 1)

[W/pole]

In

[A]

IΔn

[A]

P 1)

[W/pole]

250.03 2 25 0.03 1.20.30 1

400.03 3.2

400.03 4 0.30 1.650.30 2.5

630.03 4

1) Mean values 0.30 3.21) Mean values

Minia

C16


RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFE (6 kA)

Diagram

1

2 N

N 1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N

OFE-..-2-.. OFE-..-4-..

1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N

OFE-..-4-..

1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N

OFE-..-4-..

NL L1 L2 L3

residual current circuit breaker 4-pole

in 1-phase circuits with N-pole

residual current circuit breaker 4-pole

in 3-phase circuits without N-pole

Connection

Minia

C17

OFI Residual current circuit breakers

RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA)


��They react to sine-wave residual current.

��Standard type for common use in building and

industrial installations up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c.



��They react to sine-wave residual current.


industrial installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.




≤ 30 mA)



capacity of electrical equipment


PS-OF-1100 or PS-OF125-1100 on the right side of the

device.

��Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPN

(LPE)) by means of interconnecting busbars.

��N-pole of residual current circuit breakers in switching

on it closes before and in switching off it opens after

the other poles.

IΔn

In



3025 OFI-25-2-030AC 36797 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030AC 36800 2 0.28 1

10025 OFI-25-2-100AC 36798 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-100AC 36801 2 0.28 1

30025 OFI-25-2-300AC 36799 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-300AC 36802 2 0.28 1

IΔn

In



30

25 OFI-25-4-030AC 36806 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030AC 36809 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030AC 36813 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-030AC 36817 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-030AC 36819 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-030AC 36823 4 0.52 1

100

25 OFI-25-4-100AC 36807 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100AC 36810 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100AC 36814 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-100AC 36820 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-100AC 36824 4 0.52 1

300

25 OFI-25-4-300AC 36808 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-300AC 36811 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-300AC 36815 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-300AC 36818 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-300AC 36821 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-300AC 36825 4 0.52 1

500

40 OFI-40-4-500AC 36812 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-500AC 36816 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-500AC 36822 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-500AC 36826 4 0.52 1

10 000

10 000

Minia

C18


RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type A

��They react to both sine-wave residual current and

pulsating direct residual current (type A).


industrial installations up to 40 A, 230 V a.c.


-2510 000

IΔn

In



30

25 OFI-25-4-030A 35280 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030A 35283 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030A 35287 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-030A 36830 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-030A 36831 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-030A 36835 4 0.52 1

100

25 OFI-25-4-100A 35281 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100A 35284 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100A 35288 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-100A 36832 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-100A 36836 4 0.52 1

300

25 OFI-25-4-300A 35282 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-300A 35285 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-300A 35289 4 0.52 180 OFI-80-4-300A 35291 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-300A 36833 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-300A 36837 4 0.52 1

500

40 OFI-40-4-500A 35286 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-500A 35290 4 0.52 1

100 OFI-100-4-500A 36834 4 0.52 1125 OFI-125-4-500A 36838 4 0.52 1

IΔn

In



10 16 OFI-16-2-010A 35273 2 0.28 1

3025 OFI-25-2-030A 35274 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030A 35277 2 0.28 1

10025 OFI-25-2-100A 35275 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-100A 35278 2 0.28 1

30025 OFI-25-2-300A 35276 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-300A 35279 2 0.28 1

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type A




industrial installations up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c.


-2510 000

Minia

C19


Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type A-G



Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type AC-G


RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA)Residual current circuit breakers, type AC-G, A-G


the number of undesirable releases.


��Surge current resistance up to 3 kA (8/20 μs ).

��It is recommended to install them before the equip-

ment causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents

– heavy induction motors, large heating bodies, inter-

ference suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.



≤ 30 mA)



capacity of electrical equipment.


PS-OF-1100 on the right side of the device.

��Possibility of interconnection with circuit breakers LPN

(LPE)) by means of interconnecting busbars.

IΔn

In



3025 OFI-25-2-030AC-G 38437 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030AC-G 38438 2 0.28 1

IΔn

In



3025 OFI-25-4-030A-G 35292 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030A-G 35294 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030A-G 36839 4 0.52 1

10025 OFI-25-4-100A-G 35293 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100A-G 35295 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100A-G 35296 4 0.52 1

-2510 000 G

Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, type AC-G


IΔn

In



3025 OFI-25-4-030AC-G 38439 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-030AC-G 38440 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-030AC-G 38441 4 0.52 1

10025 OFI-25-4-100AC-G 38443 4 0.52 140 OFI-40-4-100AC-G 38444 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-100AC-G 38445 4 0.52 1

Residual current circuit breakers, 2-pole, type A-G



IΔn

In



3025 OFI-25-2-030A-G 38447 2 0.28 140 OFI-40-2-030A-G 38448 2 0.28 1

-2510 000 G

-2510 000 G

-2510 000 G

Minia

C20


RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA)




the number of undesirable releases and enable

selective switching of residual current circuit breakers.

IΔn

In



30040 OFI-40-4-300A-S 35297 4 0.52 163 OFI-63-4-300A-S 35298 4 0.52 1

S

Accessories to OFI

Auxiliary switches PS-OF-1100, PS-OF125-1100 page C22

Interconnecting busbars G2L-1000-16, G4L-1000-16, S4L-1000-16 page E52

Terminal extensions AS-25-G, AS-25-S page E57

Type OFI-..-2-.. OFI-..-4-..OFI-100-4-.. OFI-125-4-..

OFI-..-2-..-G OFI-..-4-..-G OFI-..-4-..-S

Standards EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755 EN 61008, IEC 755

Approval marks

Number of poles 2 4 4 2 4 4

Type AC, A AC, A AC, A AC-G, A-G AC- G, A-G A- S

Rated curren In

16, 25, 40 A 25, 40, 63, 80 A 100, 125 A 25, 40 A 25, 40, 63 A 40, 63 A


10, 30, 100, 300 mA 10, 30, 100, 300, 500 mA 30, 100, 300, 500 mA 30 mA 30, 100 mA 300 mA


230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c.


100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c. 100 V a.c.


240 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c. 240/415 V a.c.

Rated frequency fn

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Rated conditional short-circuit current: Inc

with back-up fuse In ≤ 63 A gG 10 kA - - 10 kA - -

with back-up fuse In ≤ 100 A gG - 10 kA 10 kA - 10 kA 10 kA

with back-up MCB LPN, LST with In max. 1:1 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA

with back-up MCB LPE with In max. 1:1 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA 6 kA

Rated making and breaking capacity Im

500 A 800 A 1 250 A 500 A 800 A 800 A

Surge resistance (8/20 μs) 1 kA 1 kA 1 kA 3 kA 3 kA 5 kA

Release delay - - - 10 ms 10 ms 40 ms

Mechanical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles

Electrical endurance >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles >10 000operating cycles >10 000 operating cycles

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Connection

Conductor 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2

Torque 2.5 Nm 3 Nm 3.5 Nm 3 Nm 3 Nm 3 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes yes yes yes yes yes


Ambient temperature type AC -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C -5 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C

type A -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary

Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2) - IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2) IEC 980:1993 2)

1) For preserving the function of the test push-button2) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín3) Rated conditional short-circuit current is related to short-circuit protection. It is also possible to protect residual current circuit breakers against overload by circuit breaker and fuse-link. In this case I

n of MCB

has to be equal or lower than In of RCCB (I

n MCB ≤ I

n RCCB) and In of fuse-link has to be by one degree lower than I

n of RCCB (I

n of fuse-link by one degree lower ≤ I

n RCCB)

Specifi cations

S

-2510 000

G G

Powers losses POFI-...-2-... OFI-...-4-...

In

[A]

IΔn

[A]

P 1)

[W/pole]

In

[A]

IΔn

[A]

P 1)

[W/pole]

16 0.01 2.525

0.03; 0.1 1.2

250.03; 0.1 2 0.3 0.65

0.30 140

0.03; 0.1 3.2

400.03; 0.1 4 0.3; 0.5 1.65

0.30 2.563

0.03; 0.1 41) Mean values 0.3; 0.5 3.2

80 0.3 4.81) Mean values

��It is recommended to install them before the equipment

causing short-time (up to 40 ms) stray currents

– heavy induction motors, large heating bodies,

interference suppressors, surge voltage arresters etc.

��Surge resistance: 5 kA (8/20 μs).


Residual current circuit breakers, 4-pole, selective, type A-S

Minia

C21


RESIDUAL CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS OFI (10 kA) Dimensions

Diagram

36 72

64

447

9045

OFI-..-2-..

OFI-125-4-..

OFI-..-4-..

72 44

64

6

71

45 87

1

2 N

N 1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N 1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N

OFI-..-2-.. OFI-..-4-.. OFI-100-4-.. , OFI-125-4-..

Connectionresidual current circuit breaker 4-pole

25 ÷ 80 Ain 1-phase circuits with N-pole

residual current circuit breaker 4-pole 100 and 125 A

in 1-phase circuits with N-pole

residual current circuit breaker 4-polein 3-phase circuits without N-pole

1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N

OFI-..-4-..

NL

1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N

OFI-..-4-..

L1 L2 L3

1

2

3

4

5

6 N

N

OFI-..-4-..

NL

Minia

C22


ACCESSORIES FOR OFE, OFI

Accessories to Type Product Arrangement Number Weight Packagecode of contacts 1) of modules [kg] [pcs]

OFI, OFE do 80 A PS-OF-1100 35309 11 0.5 0.07 1OFI 100, 125 A PS-OF125-1100 36840 11 0.5 0.07 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Type PS-OF-1100 PS-OF125-1100

Standards EN 62019 EN 62019

EN 60947-5-1

Approval marks

Arrangement of contacts 1) 11 11

Rated operating voltage / current Ue/I

eAC-12 230 V a.c. / 6 A 230 V a.c. / 5 A

AC-14 230 V a.c. / 3.6 A -

DC-12 220 V d.c. / 1 A 220 V d.c. / 0.5 A

Min. voltage / current 24 V a.c. / 50 mA 24 V a.c. / 50 mA

Short-circuit protection MCB 6 A, characteristic B or C MCB 6 A, characteristic B or C

fuse 6 A gG fuse 6 A gG



Mounting on the right side of the device on the right side of the device

Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2






Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Specifi cations

Auxiliary switches for residual current circuit breakers

��Accessories to: OFI and OFE.

��Installation: on the right side of the residual current

circuit breaker.

��For signalling the position of contacts of residual

current circuit breakers.

Minia

C23


ACCESSORIES FOR OFE, OFI

Dimensions

Diagram

9

9045

7

64

44

PS-OF-1100

13

21

14

22

11

23

24

12

9 436

60

45 87

PS-OF125-1100

PS-OF-1100 PS-OF125-1100

13 11

14 1222 24

21 23

Minia

C24


BASIC TERMS, SYMBOLS AND BREAK TIMES

��Rated residual operating current IΔn

is the value of

residual current IΔn

specifi ed by the manufacturer, at

which the residual current circuit breaker must switch

out under specifi ed conditions. Alternating residual

current must by cut off by the residual current circuit

breaker within (0.5 ÷ 1) IΔn

��Rated current In is the value of current specifi ed by the

manufacturer, which can be transferred by the residual

current circuit breaker continuously. So the current In

can pass through the contacts for an unlimited time.

Therefore it is, for instance, possible to use a residual

current circuit breaker with In = 25 A in the circuit with

max. current up to 25 A. For protection against overload

of the residual current circuit breakers OFI, OFE it is

recommended to use the circuit breakers LPE, LPN, LST

with rated current Incircuit breaker ≤ I

n RCCB

��Rated operating voltage Ue is the voltage the residual

current circuit breaker is to be connected to and which

properties are related to. The connected voltage has no

eff ect on the device function but on the function of the

test circuit and isolation properties.

��Rated frequency fn

is the frequency the residual current

circuit breaker is designed for and at which it works

correctly under stated conditions. Majority of residual

current circuit breakers are designed for fn = 50 to 60 Hz.

As the residual current circuit breaker function is based on

the induction principle, the residual current behaviour and

frequency show an eff ect upon tripping. When using a

device designed for 50/60 Hz in a network with a diff erent

frequency, the user must count on a change of the tripping

threshold i.e. a change of IΔn

��Rated conditional short-circuit current Inc

– short-

circuit strength. The function and design principle

does not allow to use the residual current circuit

breaker for protection against short-circuit. For circuit

protection it is necessary to use a circuit breaker or a

fuse. These elements cut the short-circuited circuit

safely off . The residual current circuit breaker must only

withstand the through-going short-circuit current. The

amplitude of the maximum through current is defi ned

as rated conditional short-circuit current Inc

. The short-

circuit strength is then expressed by the current Inc

. For

example, on the rating plate, Inc

= 10 kA is expressed by

the following symbol:

��Ambient temperature T for the residual current circuit

breakers is (-5 ÷ +40) °C according to almost all

international standards. Some residual current circuit

breakers work in an extended range (-25 ÷ +40) °C.

This possibility is identifi ed by the following symbol on

the rating plate:

��Residual current circuit breaker – type AC – reacts to

sine-wave residual current – it is used in conventional

AC networks

��Residual current circuit breaker – type A – reacts

to sine-wave alternating and pulsating direct residual

currents – it is used in conventional AC networks and the

networks with phase power regulation etc.

��Residual current circuit breaker – type G – special

residual current circuit breaker reducing the number of

undesirable cut-off s. It is mainly installed before the

devices causing short-time (up to 10 ms) stray currents.

Identifi cation: G

Surge resistance: 3 kA (8/20 μs)

Release delay: 10 ms

��Residual current circuit breaker – type S – special

residual current circuit breaker, which is mainly

intended for selective switching of residual current

circuit breakers and reduction of undesirable cut-off s.

It is installed before the devices causing short-time

(up to 40 ms) stray currents.

Identifi cation: S

Surge resistance: 5 kA (8/20 μs)

Release delay: 40 ms

Selective (discriminating) switching means that if the

residual current circuit breakers are connected in series,

only the device in which circuit a failure occurs will cut

off the current. More specifi cally, only the device in which

the tripping residual current appears due to a failure

in the protected circuit will turn off the current. The

advantage consists in maintaining the power supply in

the other circuits not aff ected by the failure.

Such function of the protected circuit is achieved by

connection of the selective residual current circuit breaker

(see Fig. 1) before the standard or G type residual current

circuit breaker, with the following ratio of rated residual

currents:

Fig. 1. Simplifi ed example of selective

connection of residual current circuit breakers

IΔn S

≥ 3 x IΔn -,G

IΔnS

rated residual operating current of the selective

residual current circuit breaker

IΔn -,G

rated residual operating current of standard or G type

residual current circuit breaker

The main reason of selective disconnecting of circuits is

higher time delay of the selective residual current circuit

breakers in tripping (compared to standard or G type

ones).

��Residual current circuit breaker with overcurrent

protection – this device is a combination of residual

current circuit breaker and circuit breaker with 2-module

width – it saves the space in the switchboard compared

to conventional connection of two separate devices

(3 modules). This eliminates the problem of back-up

protection and interconnection. The disadvantage

of such a design compared to conventional one is that

it is not possible to identify whether the tripping was

actuated by the residual current circuit breaker or by the

circuit breaker.

10 000

-25

G

S

load

I = 0.3 AΔnS

I = 0.1 AΔn- I = 0.03 AΔnG

load

Min. time delay and break times of the residual current circuit breakersType of residual current circuit breakers

standard G SMin. time delay T

v s - 0.01 0.04

Break times t at IΔn s t ≤ 0.3 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.3 0.13 ≤ t ≤ 0.5

(according to EN 61008-1) at 2IΔn s t ≤ 0.15 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.15 0.06 ≤ t ≤ 0.2

at 5IΔn s t ≤ 0.04 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.04 0.05 ≤ t ≤ 0.15

at 500 A s t ≤ 0.04 0.01 ≤ t ≤ 0.04 0.04 ≤ t ≤ 0.15

note no bottom limits of the break time value 0.01 s is not given by standard break times are valid for the residual current circuit breaker with I

n ≥ 25 A and I

Δn > 0.03 A

OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS

Minia

D

��Overview of overvoltage protections............................................................................... D2

��Lightning current arresters - type 1.................................................................................. D3

��Combined lightning current and surge voltage

arresters - type 1 + type 2...................................................................................................... D8

��Surge voltage arresters - type 2......................................................................................... D12

��Surge voltage arresters - type 3......................................................................................... D16

��Surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic systems................................................... D19

��Replaceable modules.............................................................................................................. D21

��Recommendations for design, installation and measurement

of overvoltage protections..................................................................................................... D22

Minia

D2

Overvoltage protections

OVERVIEW OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS

Design T1 T1 + T2Preview

Type SJB SJBplus SJBC SVBC

Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11

type 1 type 1 type 1 + type 2 type 1 + type 2

Maximum constant operating voltage Uc

350 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 275 V a.c.

Lightning current (10/350 μs) / pole Iimp

25 kA 50 kA 25 kA 12,5 kA

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole In

25 kA 50 kA 25 kA 20 kA

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole Imax

- - 40 kA 50 kA

Voltage protection level Up

≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 2.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV

Replaceable module � - � -

Optical signalling � - � �

Remote signalling � - � �

� available, - unavailable

Design T2 T3 T2 FVPreview

Type SVC-275 SVC-350 SVM-440 SVD-253 SVD-335 SVF

Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11

type 2 type 2 type 2 type 3 type 3 type 2

Maximum constant operating voltage Uc

275 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 253 V a.c 335 V a.c. 1000 V / 600 V d.c.

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole In

20 kA 20 kA 20 kA 3 kA 1,5 kA 15 kA

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) / pole Imax

40 kA 40 kA 40 kA 10 kA 4,5 kA 30 kA / 40 kA

Off -load voltage Uoc

- - - 6 kV 4 kV -


≤ 1.35 kV ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 2.2 kV ≤ 1.1 kV ≤ 1.2 kV ≤ 5 kV / 3 kV

Replaceable module - � � � � �

Optical signalling � � � � � �

Remote signalling � � � � � �

� available, - unavailable

FV - intended mainly for photovoltaic sources

Minia

D3


LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1��For protection of electric networks and equipment against

overvoltage from direct or indirect lightning strokes in

the arresting equipment of buildings, LV lines etc.

��For protection of electric networks and equipment in resi-

dential, commercial and industrial buildings etc.

��It reduces voltage and „cut up“ the overvoltage wave

power caused by direct or indirect lightning stroke.

��Use: as the fi rst stage (coarse protection) in three degree

scale of protection against overvoltage – type 1 accor-

ding to EN 61643-11.

��For further information on OEZ off er of overvoltage

protection see „Overvoltage protections – Application

manual”.

Lightning current arresters SJB-25E-...

��Lightning current arresters designed for building,

residential, commercial and other similar installations

classed in group „big installation threat“.

��For four-wire TN-C network, use SJB-25E-3-MZS , and

for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use SJB-25E-3N-MZS.

��The main element is an enclosed spark gap with

electronic ignition release able to arrest lightning

current up to 25 kA (10/350μs).

��Ability of quenching of follow current up to 50 kA.

��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution boards

and switchboard cabinets Distri.

��Design: multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable

modules. The modules can be removed in case

of measurement or failure without necessity of device

disconnection.

��Remote and visual signalling of the shut-down device

state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester

is non-functional and the replaceable module must be

replaced).

��The modules can be turned in their base by 180°, so

that it is also possible to turn the whole device while

keeping legibility of description (e.g. at connection

from the top).

��Lightning current arresters SJB-25E-... partly replace

the type 1, which are shown in the cataloguey Minia

(N1-2008-C ). The replacements are shown in details

in the conversion table at the end of the chapter.

Network Type Product Number Weight Packagecode of modules [kg] [pcs]

TN-C (3L + PEN) SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 6 0.91 1TN-S (3L + N + PE ) SJB-25E-3N-MZS 38358 8 1.31 1

Accessories

Terminal extensions AS-.., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57

Minia

D4


LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1Lightning current arresters SJBplus-50-2,5

��Lightning current arrester for demanding applications,

industry, power engineering etc.

��For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SJBplus-50-2.5,

and for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use the combinati-

on 3 pcs SJBplus-50-2.5 + 1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5.

��Main component is a powerful arrester gap with


current up to 50 kA (10/350 μs).

��Ability of quenching of follow current up to 50 kA.

��It is necessary to consider deionization space shown

on page D7.

Accessories

Interconnecting busbars G1L-1000-16-L page E52


Summing spark gap SJB-NPE-1,5

��Lightning current arrester intended especially for

connection 3+1 or 1+1.

��Use as a summary spark gap between N and PE in TN-S

or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1“).

��Main component is a powerful arrester gap with



��Ability of quenching of follow short-circuit current

up to 100 A without the ionized gas.



Connection Type Product Number Weight Package

between code of modules [kg] [pcs]

L-PEN, L-PE, L-N SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 2 0.567 1

Connection Type Product Number Weight Package


N-PE SJB-NPE-1,5 34716 2 0.32 1

Minia

D5


LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1

Specifi cations

Type SJB-25E-3-MZS SJB-25E-3N-MZS SJBplus-50-2.5 SJB-NPE-1.5

Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11

IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1

VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6

Approval marks

Rated voltage UN

230 V/400 V a.c. 230 V/400 V a.c. 400 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Maximum constant operating voltage UC

350 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 260 V a.c.

Lightning current (10/350 μs) Iimp

peak value Ipeakl 75 kA (25 kA / pole) 100 kA (25 kA / pole) 50 kA 100 kA

charge Q 37.5 As 50 As 25 As 50 As

specific energy W/R 1.4 MJ/Ω 2.5 MJ/Ω 0.625 MJ/Ω 2.5 MJ/Ω

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) In

L-N - 25 kA 50 kA -

N-PE - 100 kA - 100 kA

L-PEN 25 kA - 50 kA -

Rated frequency fn

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz


L-N - ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 2.5 kV -

N-PE - ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV

L-PEN ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 2.5 kV -

Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 1 type 1 type 1 type 1

according to IEC 61643-1 class I class I class I class I

according to VDE 0675-6 class B class B class B class B

Response time L-N - ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns -

N-PE - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns

L-PEN ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns -

Quenching follow-current Ifi

L-N - 50 kA / 264 V a.c. 50 kA / 400 V a.c. -

N-PE - 0.1 kA - 0.1 kA

L-PEN 50 kA / 264 V a.c. - 50 kA / 400 V a.c. -

Max. backup fuse gG / gL 315 A 315 A 500 A -

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35

Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 10 ÷ 50 mm2 10 ÷ 50 mm2

Conductor flexible 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 16 ÷ 35 mm2 16 ÷ 35 mm2

Torque 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 8 Nm 8 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes yes yes yes

Optical signalling

Functional state green colour green colour - -

Non-functional state red colour red colour - -

Remote signalling

Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 001 - -

Max. voltage / current Umax

/ Imax

250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A - -

125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A - -

Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 - -

Torque 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm - -


Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Minia

D6


LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1Dimensions

43.55.5

64

45 90

142.8

SJB-25E-3N-MZS

107.1

SJB-25E-3-MZS~8

~7

12

11

14

12

11

14

35

45 90

58

5.5 43.5

SJB-NPE-1.5

35 5.5 43.5

72.5

45 151

SJBplus-50-2.5

Minia

D7


LIGHTNING CURRENT ARRESTERS - TYPE 1

Diagram

By the action of arrester there happens to the ionized gas

from the back side of the arrester. Deionization space is

defi ned in fi g. 1). In the deionization space there must

not be any highly and medium combustible material (fi re

reaction class C, D, E or F according to EN 13501-1 +A1) or

live bare conductive parts. Minimum distance from ma-

terials combustible with diffi culty or non-combustible

materials (fi re reaction class A1, A2, B) is shown in fi g. 2).

55 mm 55 mm

55 mm55 mm

100 mm

120°

7.5 mm

55 m

m55

mm

1) 2)

N ( )

(N)

SJB-NPE-1,5

L/N ( )

(L/N)

SJBplus-50-2,5

Deionization spaces SJBplus-50-2,5

N

L1 L2 L3

SJB-25E-3N-MZS

L1 L2 L3

SJB-25E-3-MZS

1112 14 1112 14

Minia

D8


COMBINED LIGHTNING CURRENT AND SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 1 + TYPE 2 +

��For protection of electric networks and equipment against

overvoltage from direct or indirect lightning strokes

in the arresting equipment of buildings, LV lines etc.

��For protection against overvoltage caused by atmo-

spheric disturbances and from switching processes

in networks.

��For protection of common wiring in apartments,

houses, commercial buildings etc.


power caused by direct or indirect lightning stroke

and or switching processes in the networks.

��Use: as the fi rst stage (coarse protection) and the second

stage (medium protection) in three degree scale of

protection against overvoltage – type 1 and type 2

according to EN 61643-11.

��For further information on OEZ off er of overvoltage pro-

tection see „Overvoltage protections – Application

manual”.

��Lightning current and surge voltage arresters designed

for building, residential, commercial and other similar

installations classed in group „big installation threat“.

��For four-wire TN-C network, use SJBC-25E-3-MZS, and for

fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use SJBC-25E-3N-MZS.

��Main components are an enclosed spark gap with

electronic ignition release (T1) able to arrest lightning

current up to 25 kA (10/350 μs) and a parallel varistor

(T2) with quicker reaction time (25 ns).

��Ability of quenching of follow short-circuit current

up to 25 kA without the ionized gas.



��Design: multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable



disconnection.


state (after disconnection the lightning current arrester

is non-functional and the replaceable module must be

replaced).

��The modules can be turned in their base by 180°, so

that it is also possible to turn the whole device while

keeping legibility of description (e.g. at connection

from the top).

��Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SJBC-25E-...

replace the connection of overvoltage protections

of the 1st and 2nd type installed in series next to each

other, shown in the catalogue Modular devices Minia

(N1-2008-A). The replacements are shown in details


Network Type Product Number Weight Package

code of modules [kg] [pcs]

TN-C (3L + PEN) SJBC-25E-3-MZS 38361 6 1.04 1

TN-S (3L + N + PE) SJBC-25E-3N-MZS 38362 8 1.43 1

Accessories


Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SJBC-25E-...

Minia

D9


��Lightning current arresters designed for building,

residential, commercial and other similar installations

classed in group „medium installation threat“.

��For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SVBC-12.5-1(-S), and

for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use 3 pcs SVBC-12.5-1(-S)

+ 1 pc SVBC-50-N.

��Main component is varistor, able to arrest lightning

current up to 12,5 kA (10/350 μs).

��Possibility of mounting in casual distribution board and

switchboard cabinets Distri.


state (after disconnection the lightning current

arrester is non-functional and it must be replaced).

��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-S.

��Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SVBC-...

can be used instead of connection of overvoltage

protections of the 1st and 2nd type installed in series

next to each other, shown in the catalogue Modular

devices Minia (N1-2008-A). The replacements are

shown in details in the conversion table at the end

of the chapter.

��Possibility of easy interconnection with circuit breakers

LPE, LPN by means of interconnecting busbar.

Summing spark gap SVBC-50-N

��Lightning current and surge voltage arrester designed

especially for connection 3+1 or 1+1.


or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1”).

��Main component is an enclosed spark gap able to arrest

lightning current up to 50 kA (10/350 μs).




Connection Design Type Product Number Weight Package


L-PEN, L-PE, L-N without remote signalling SVBC-12,5-1 39027 1 0.15 1

L-PEN, L-PE, L-N with remote signalling SVBC-12,5-1-S 38945 1 0.16 1



N-PE without remote signalling SVBC-50-N 39004 1 0.11 1

Accessories

Interconnecting busbars G1L-50-16-L, G1L-65-16-L, G1L-1000-16-L, S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. page E52


Lightning current and surge voltage arresters SVBC-12,5...

Minia

D10



Specifi cations

Type SJBC-25E-3-MZS SJBC-25E-3N-MZSSVBC-12,5-1 SVBC-12,5-1-S

SVBC-50-N

Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11

IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1

VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6

Approval marks

Rated voltage UN

230 V/400 V a.c. 230 V/400 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.


350 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 275 V a.c. 255 V a.c.

Lightning current (10/350 μs) Iimp

peak value Ipeakl 75 kA (25 kA / pole) 100 kA (25 kA / pole) 12.5 kA 50 kA

charge Q 37.5 As 50 As 6.25 As 25 As

specific energy W/R 1.4 MJ/Ω 2.5 MJ/Ω 39 kJ/Ω 625 kJ/Ω


L-N - 25 kA 20 kA -

N-PE - 100 kA - 50 kA

L-PEN 25 kA - 20 kA -

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Imax

L-N - 40 kA 50 kA -

N-PE - - - 100 kA

L-PEN 40 kA - 50 kA -

Rated frequency fn

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz


L-N - ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV -N-PE - ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV

L-PEN ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV -Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 1 and type 2 + type 1 and type 2 + type 1 and type 2 + type 1 and type 2 +

according to IEC 61643-1 class I and class II class I and class II class I and class II class I and class II

according to VDE 0675-6 class B and class C class B and class C class B and class C class B and class C

Response time L-N - ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns -N-PE - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns

L-PEN ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns -Quenching follow-current I

fi L-N - 25 kA / 264 V a.c. - -

N-PE - 0.1 kA - 0.1 kA

L-PEN 25 kA / 264 V a.c. - - -

Max. backup fuse gG / gL 315 A 315 A 160 A gL -


Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35

Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2 2.5 ÷ 35 mm2

Conductor flexible 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2 2.5 ÷ 25 mm2

Torque 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 3.5 Nm 3.5 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes yes yes yes

Optical signalling

Functional state green colour green colour green colour -

Non-functional state red red red -

Remote signalling

Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 001 001 -


/ Imax

250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 0.5 A -

125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A -

Min. switched power 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) -

Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 -

Torque 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm -


Ambient temperature -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C


Minia

D11



Dimensions

43.55.5

64

45 90

142.8

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS

107.1

SJBC-25E-3-MZS~8

~7

12

11

14

12

11

14

Diagram

SJBC-25E-3-MZS

L3L2L1

N

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS

L3L2L1

1112 141112 14

SVBC-...

17.5

~99

.5

~11

~9

69

44

9045

14

11

12

7

L/N ( )

(L/N)

12 11 14 N ( )

( )N

L/N ( )

(L/N)

SVBC-12,5-1-S SVBC-12,5-1 SVBC-50-N

Minia

D12


��For protection of electric networks and equipment

against overvoltage from indirect lightning strokes.

��For protection against overvoltage caused by atmospheric

disturbances and from switching processes in networks.


commercial buildings etc.


power caused by indirect lightning stroke and or

switching processes in the networks.

��Use:

- as the second stage (medium protection) in 3-stage over-

voltage protection - type 2 according to EN 61643-11

Surge voltage arresters SVC in fi xed design

��Surge voltage arresters designed for building,

residential, commercial and similar installations

classed in group „low installation threat“.

��For four-wire TN-C network, use 3 pcs SVC-275-1(-S), and

for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use the combination

3 pcs SVC-275-1(-S) + 1 pc SVC-255-N-S.






state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester

is non-functional and it must be replaced).

��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-S

��Surge voltage arresters SVC-275-... replace the designs

of overvoltage protections of the 2nd type SVL-275...,

shown in the catalogue Modular devices Minia

(N1- 2008-C).The replacements are shown in details






L-PEN, L-PE, L-N without remote signalling SVC-275-1 38842 1 0.095 1with remote signalling SVC-275-1-S 38843 1 0.100 1

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2



N-PE with remote signalling SVC-255-N-S 38844 1 0.100 1

Summing spark gap SVC-255-N-S

��Surge voltage arrester designed especially for



or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1”).

��Main component is a power arrester, able to arrest





state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester

is non-functional and it must be replaced).



��Surge voltage arresters designed for building,

residential, commercial and similar installations

classed in group „low installation threat“.

��For four-wire TN-C network, use SVC-350-3-MZ(S), and

for fi ve-wire TN-S, TT network use SVC-350-3N-MZ(S).





��Design two-part device consisting of a base and

replaceable module with a varistor. In case of a failure

it is suffi cient to replace the module by a new one

without the need of turning the device off .


state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is

non-functional and the replaceable module must be

replaced).

��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-MZS.

��Surge voltage arresters SVC-350-... replace the designs

of overvoltage protections SVL-275..., shown in the

catalogue Modular devices Minia (N1-2008-C ). The

replacements are shown in details in the conversion

table at the end of the chapter.



Surge voltage arresters SVC with a replaceable module (multipole)

Network Design Type Product Number Weight Package


TN-C without remote signalling SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 3 0.393 1(3L + PEN) with remote signalling SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 3 0.403 1TN-S without remote signalling SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 4 0.433 1(3L + N+ PE ) with remote signalling SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 4 0.443 1

Minia

D13


Accessories

Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. page E52

Terminal extensions AS-..., CS-FH000.., N3x10-FH000 page E57

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 2Overvoltage protections SVM with removable module

��Surge voltage arresters for demanding applications,

industry, power engineering etc.

��Use mainly in combination with SJBplus-50-2.5, if the

length of the line between T1 and T2 is shorter than 5 m.











arrester is non-functional and the replaceable module

must be replaced).

��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-ZS.





L-PEN, L-PE, L-N without remote signalling SVM-440-Z 34720 1 0.136 1with remote signalling SVM-440-ZS 34721 1 0.143 1



N-PE without remote signalling SVM-NPE-Z 34723 1 0.130 1

Summing spark gap SVM-NPE-Z

��Surge voltage arrester designed especially for



or TT network (connection „3+1“ or „1+1“).

��Main component is a power arrester, able to arrest




��Visual signalling of the shut-down device state (after

disconnection the lightning current arrester is non-

functional and the replaceable module must be

replaced).



Minia

D14



TypeSVC-275-1SVC-275-1-S SVC-255-N-S SVC-350-3-MZ

SVC-350-3-MZSSVC-350-3N-MZSVC-350-3N-MZS

SVM-440-ZSVM-440-ZS SVM-NPE-Z

Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11

IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1

VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6

Approval marks

Rated voltage UN

230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V /400 V a.c. 230 V /400 V a.c. 400 V a.c. 230 V a.c.


275 V a.c. 255 V a.c. 350 V a.c. 350 V a.c. (L-N) 440 V a.c. 260 V a.c.

350 V d.c. - - 264 V a.c. (N-PE) 585 V d.c. -


L-N 20 kA - 20 kA / pole 20 kA / pole 20 kA -

N-PE - 30 kA - 20 kA - 20 kA

L-PEN 20 kA - 20 kA / pole - 20 kA -


L-N 40 kA - 40 kA / pole 40 kA / pole 40 kA -

N-PE - 50 kA - 40 kA - 40 kA

L-PEN 40 kA - 40 kA / pole - 40 kA -

Rated frequency fn

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz


L-N ≤ 1.35 kV - ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 1.4 kV ≤ 2.2 kV -

N-PE - ≤ 1.3 kV - ≤ 1.5 kV - ≤ 1 kV

L-PEN ≤ 1.35 kV - ≤ 1.4 kV - ≤ 2.2 kV -

Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 2 type 2 type 2 type 2 type 2 type 2

according to IEC 61643-1 class II class II class II class II class II class II

according to VDE 0675-6 class C class C class C class C class C class C

Response time L-N ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns -

N-PE - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns - ≤ 100 ns

L-PEN ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns - ≤ 25 ns -

Max. backup fuse gG / gL 125 A - 125 A 125 A 125 A -

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35

Connection

Conductor rigid (solid, stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2 0.5 ÷ 35 mm2

Conductor flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2

Torque 2 Nm 2 Nm 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm 4.5 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes yes only bottom only bottom yes yes

Optical signalling

Functional state green colour green colour transparent colour transparent colour transparent colour transparent colour

Non-functional state red red red red red red

Remote signalling

Arrangement of contacts 1) 001 001 001 001 001 -


/ Imax

250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A -

125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A -

Min. switched power 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V. 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V / 10 mA) -

Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 -

Torque 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm 0.25 Nm -


Ambient temperature -25 ÷ 45 °C -25 ÷ 45 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 80 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C -40 ÷ 85 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Specifi cations

Minia

D15



Dimensions

12

11

14

17.5 44

62

~4.5

45 86

~5.5

~7

~95

SVC-275-...

SVC-255-...

Diagram

SVM-440-ZSSVC-255-N-S

N ( )

( )N

1112 14

SVC-275-1-SSVC-275-1 SVM-440-Z

SVC-350-3N-MZ

L1 L2 L3 N

SVC-350-3N-MZS

1112 14

L1 L2 L3 N

SVC-350-3-MZ

L1 L2 L3

SVC-350-3-MZS

1112 14

L1 L2 L3

L/N ( ) 1112 14

(L/ )N

L/N ( ) 1112 14

(L/ )N

L/N ( )

(L/ )N

L/N ( )

(L/ )N

SVM-NPE-Z

N ( )

( )N

9

5.5 43.5

64

45 90

52.5

14

11

12

70

14

11

12

SVC-350-3-MZSVC-350-3-MZS

SVC-350-3N-MZSVC-350-3N-MZS

17.5

~97

12

11

14

9045

58

5.5

~8

43.5

~7

SVM-...

Minia

D16


SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3��For protection of electric networks and equipment




in networks.


houses, commercial buildings etc.




��Use: as the third stage (fi ne protection) in 3-stage overvol-

tage protection – type 3 according to EN 61643-11.

��For further information on OEZ off er of overvoltage pro-

tection see „Overvoltage protections – Application

manual”.

Surge voltage arresters SVD

��Surge voltage arresters designed for protection

of overvoltage sensitive devices.

��Use mainly in networks TN-S, TT. If used in TN-C network

it is necessary to connect terminals N and PE.

��SVD-253-1N-MZS is intended for single-phase distribu-

tion systems and SVD-335-3N-MZS for three-phase

distribution systems.


current in 2-pole design up to 10 kA (8/20 μs) and

in 4-pole design up to 4.5 kA (8/20 μs).








state (after disconnection the surge voltage arrester is

non-functional and the replaceable module must be

replaced).

��Surge voltage arrester SVD-253-1N-MZS replaces the

„black“ SVD-250M-ZS shown in the catalogue Modular

devices MINIA (N1-2008-A). The replacements are

shown in details in the conversion table at the end

of the chapter.

Design Type Product Number Weight Package

for network code of modules [kg] [pcs]

single-phase SVD-253-1N-MZS 38371 1 0.081 1three-phase SVD-335-3N-MZS 38372 2 0.129 1

Minia

D17


Type SVD-253-1N-MZS SVD-335-3N-MZS

Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11

IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1

VDE 0675-6 VDE 0675-6

Approval marks

Rated voltage UN

230 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c.


L-N 253 V a.c. 335 V a.c.

N-PE - 255 V a.c.


L-N 3 kA 1.5 kA / pole

L-PE 3 kA 1.5 kA

N-PE - 1.5 kA


L-N 10 kA 4.5 kA

L-PE 10 kA 4.5 kA

N-PE 10 kA 10 kA

Rated loading current at 30 °C IL

26 A 26 A

Off -load voltage Uoc 6 kV 4 kV

Rated frequency fn 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz


L-N ≤ 1.1 kV ≤ 1.2 kV

L-PE ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV

N-PE ≤ 1.5 kV ≤ 1.5 kV

Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 3 type 3

according to IEC 61643-1 class III class III

according to VDE 0675-6 class D class D

Response time L-N ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns

L-PE ≤ 100 ns ≤ 100 ns

Max. backup circuit breaker (C) or fuse gG / gL 25 A 25 A


Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35

Optical signalling

Functional state transparent colour transparent colour

Non-functional state red red

Remote signalling



/ Imax

250 V a.c. / 3 A 250 V a.c. / 3 A

50 V d.c. / 3 A 50 V d.c. / 3 A

Connection




Top or bottom connection only bottom only bottom



Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts


Specifi cations

Minia

D18


SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS - TYPE 3Dimensions

45 90

58

7 4417.7

2

4

N

1 N

6 L

5 L

12

11

3

35.4

6

4

L1

2N

11

12

10 L3

8 L2

9 L3

7 L21N

5L1

3

SVD-253-1N-MZS SVD-335-3N-MZS

Diagram

SVD-253-1N-MZS

5 / L

1 / N

3 /

6 / L

2 / N

11

12

4 /

IN OUT 5 / L1

7 / L2

9 / L3

1 / N

3 /

6 / L1

8 / L2

10 / L3

2 / N

11

12

4 /

IN OUT

SVD-335-3N-MZS

Minia

D19


��Surge voltage arresters intended for building,

residential, commercial and similar installations,

part of which are DC applications (e.g. photovoltaic

source).

��For applications with maximum operating voltage up to

1000 V type SVF-1000-2VB-MZ(S) is used, for appli-

cations with maximum operating voltage up to 600 V

type SVF-600-3V-MZ(S) is used.

��Type SVF-1000-2VB-MZ(S) provides galvanical insula-

tion from the ground. It is therefore convenient for

insulated systems.

��Main components are varistors connected in “Y”. In type

1000 V there is lightning arrester on the place of

varistor between the common bus and ground that

limits the arrested current.



��Design multipart, consisting of a base and replaceable



disconnection.



arrester is non-functional and the replaceable

module must be replaced).

��Remote signalling of state is provided in type ...-MZS.

Surge voltage arresters SVF

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS��For protection of electric networks and equipment




in networks.

��For protection of parts of photovoltaic sources mainly

on their DC side.




��Use:

- as the second stage (medium protection) against

overvoltage – type 2 according to EN 61643-11.

��For further information on OEZ off er for photovoltaic

systems see catalogue „Protective and switching

devices of photovoltaic sources””.

Uoc max

Design Type Product Number Weight Package


1000 V d.c. without remote signalling SVF-1000-2VB-MZ 39165 3 0.344 1

1000 V d.c. with remote signalling SVF-1000-2VB-MZS 39527 3 0.347 1

600 V d.c. without remote signalling SVF-600-3V-MZ 39528 3 0.322 1

600 V d.c. with remote signalling SVF-600-3V-MZS 39529 3 0.325 1

Accessories


Minia

D20


SVF-600-3V-MZ SVF-600-3V-MZS

L+ L-

L+ L-

1112 14

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

L+ L-

SVF-1000-2VB-MZS

L+ L-

1112 14

TypeSVF-1000-2VB-MZSVF-1000-2VB-MZS

SVF-600-3V-MZSVF-600-3V-MZS

Standards EN 61643-11 EN 61643-11IEC 61643-1 IEC 61643-1IEC 60364-7-712 IEC 60364-7-712

Approval marks

Max. off -load voltage Uoc max 1000 V d.c. 600 V d.c.

Max. short-circuit current Isc max 80 A without limits


1000 V d.c. 600 V d.c.

Rated discharge current (8/20 μs) In 15 kA 15 kA

Maximum discharge current (8/20 μs) Imax 30 kA 40 kA


In 15 kA L+, L- ≤ 5 kV ≤ 3 kV

(L+/L-), PE ≤ 3 kV ≤ 3 kV

In 10 kA L+, L- ≤ 4.5 kV -

(L+/L-), PE ≤ 2.5 kV -

In 5 kA L+, L- ≤ 4 kV ≤ 2.5 kV

(L+/L-), PE ≤ 2 kV ≤ 2.5 kV

Earth-leakage current at Uc

IPE L+, PE / L-, PE < 1 μA < 20 μA

Still stand power input Pc < 1 mW < 12 mW

Voltage protection levels of the individual modules Up In 15 kA varistor / arrester ≤ 2.5 kV / ≤ 3 kV ≤ 3 kV / -

Response time ≤ 25 ns ≤ 25 ns

Arrester classification according to EN 61643-11 type 2 type 2

according to IEC 61643-1 class II class II

according to VDE 0675-6 class C class C


Mounting on “U” rail according to EN – type TH 35 TH 35

Connection


Conductor flexible 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2 1.5 ÷ 25 mm2


Top or bottom connection - -

Optical signalling

Functional state transparent colour transparent colour

Non-functional state red colour red colour

Remote signalling



/ Imax

250 V a.c. / 1 A 250 V a.c. / 1 A

125 V d.c. / 0.2 A 125 V d.c. / 0.2 A

Min. switched power 0.12 VA (12 V, 10 mA) 0.12 VA (12 V, 10 mA)

Connection – conductor (rigid, flexible) 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2 0.14 ÷ 1.5 mm2




Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

SURGE VOLTAGE ARRESTERS FOR PHOTOVOLTAIC SYSTEMS

Dimensions Diagram

5.5 43.5

64

45 90

52.5

SVF-...

14

11

12

Specifi cations

Minia

D21


REPLACEABLE MODULES

Newly produced Connection Spare module Product Number Weight Package

devices between code of modules [kg] [pcs]

T1

SJB-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SJB-25E-1-M 38360 2.00 0.2400 10

SJB-25E-3N-MZS L-N SJB-25E-1-M 38360 2.00 0.2400 10

SJB-25E-3N-MZS N-PE SJB-100E-N-M 38359 2.00 0.2400 10

T1 + T2

SJBC-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SJB-N25E-1-M 38363 1.33 0.1290 10

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS L-N SJB-N25E-1-M 38363 1.33 0.1290 10

SJBC-25E-3-MZS L-PEN SVC-N350-1-M 38364 0.66 0.0520 10

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS L-N SVC-N350-1-M 38364 0.66 0.0520 10

SJB-25E-3N-MZS N-PE SJB-100E-N-M 38359 2.00 0.2400 10

T2

SVC-350-3-MZ(S) L-PEN SVC-350-1-M 38369 1.00 0.0510 10

SVC-350-3N-MZ(S) L-N SVC-350-1-M 38369 1.00 0.0510 10

SVC-350-3N-MZ(S) N-PE SVC-264-N-M 38370 1.00 0.0400 10

T2SVM-440-ZS L-PEN; L-N SVM-440 34722 1.00 0.0490 10

SVM-NPE-Z N-PE SVM-NPE 34724 1.00 0.0390 10

T3SVD-253-1N-MZS L-N; N-PE SVD-253-1N-M 38373 1.00 0.0270 10

SVD-335-3N-MZS L-N; N-PE SVD-335-3N-M 38374 2.00 0.0430 10

T2 - FV

SVF-600-3V-MZ(S) X-L+;X-L-;X-PE SVF-600-V-M 39530 1.00 0.0717 20

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ X-L+; X-L- SVF-1000-V-M 39166 1.00 0.0826 20

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ X-PE SVF-1000-B-M 39167 1.00 0.0454 20

Replacement of module

X = common connection bus Y at SVF-1000-..

Formerly produced Connection Spare module Product Number Weight Package

devices between code of modules [kg] [pcs]

T2

SVM275-Z(S) L-PEN; L-N SVM275 13003 1.00 0.045 1

SVM440-Z(S) L-PEN; L-N SVM440 18564 1.00 0.060 1

SVM260/NPE-Z N-PE SVM260/NPE 14427 1.00 0.045 1

T3 SVD250M-ZS L-N; N-PE SVD250M 13021 1.00 0.022 1

Minia

D22


RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONSConversion tables of former and new designs

Formerly produced devices Newly produced devicesNote

Type designation ID Type designation ID

Type 1

SJBplus-50-1,5 34715 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 adequate design

SJBplus50/1,5 14423 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 adequate design

SJBplus-50 34714 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 innovation - electronic ignition spark gap

SJBplus50 14424 SJBplus-50-2,5 39227 innovation - electronic ignition spark gap

SJBpro-35-1,5 34713SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)

SJB-25E-3N-MZS 38358 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)

SJBpro35/1,5 14422SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)


SJBpro-35 34712SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)


SJBpro35 13019SJB-25E-3-MZS 38357 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)


SJB100/NPE/1,5 14425 SJB-NPE-1,5 34716 adequate design

Type 2

SVM440-Z 18565 SVM-440-Z 34720 adequate design

SVM440-ZS 18566 SVM-440-ZS 34721 adequate design

SVM-275-Z 34717SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)

SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)

SVM275-Z 13004SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)

SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)

SVM-275-ZS 34718SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)

SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)

SVM275-ZS 13005 SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 multipole design (3+0; TN-C)

SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 multipole design (3+1; TN-S, TT)

SVM260/NPE-Z 14426 SVM-NPE-Z 34723 adequate design

SVL-275 37405 SVC-275-1 38842 adequate design

SVL275 07439 SVC-275-1 38842 adequate design

SVL-275-S 37406 SVC-275-1-S 38843 adequate design

SVL275S 07440 SVC-275-1-S 38843 adequate design

SJL275 07441 SVC-275-1 38842 higher In, higher I

max

SJL275S 07442 SVC-275-1-S 38843 higher In, higher I

max

SVL-NPE-S 37410 SVC-255-N-S 38844 adequate design

Type 3SVD-250M-ZS 34725 SVD-253-1N-MZS 38371 adequate design

SVD250M-ZS 13020 SVD-253-1N-MZS 38371 adequate design

Table of tolerance zones at 1 mA

Type designation Product Voltage tolerance zone Type designation Product Voltage tolerance zone

code at 1 mA (formerly produced devices) code at 1 mA

SVBC-12,5-1 39027 459 - 561 V SVL-275 37405 459 - 561 V

SVBC-12,5-1-S 38945 459 - 561 V SVL-275-S 37406 459 - 561 V

SVC-275-1 38842 459 - 561 V SVM-275-Z 34717 387 - 473 V

SVC-275-1-S 38843 459 - 561 V SVM-275-ZS 34718 387 - 473 V

SVC-350-3-MZ 38365 509 - 621 V SVM-275 34719 387 - 473 V

SVC-350-3-MZS 38366 509 - 621 V SVL275 07439 459 - 561 V

SVC-350-3N-MZ 38367 509 - 621 V SVL275S 07440 459 - 561 V

SVC-350-3N-MZS 38368 509 - 621 V SVM275-Z 13004 387 - 473 V

SVC-350-1-M 38369 509 - 621 V SVM275-ZS 13005 387 - 473 V

SVM-440-Z 34720 644 - 786 V SVM275 13003 387 - 473 V

SVM-440-ZS 34721 644 - 786 V SVM440-Z 18565 644 - 786 V

SVM-440 34722 644 - 786 V SVM440-ZS 18566 644 - 786 V

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ 39165 960 - 1056 V SVM440 18564 644 - 786 V

SVF-1000-2VB-MZS 39527 960 - 1056 V

SVF-600-3V-MZ 39528 558 - 682 V

SVF-600-3V-MZS 39529 558 - 682 V

SVF-1000-V-M 39166 960 - 1056 VSVF-600-V-M 39530 558 - 682 V

��Varistor is able to provide protection against overvol-

tage repeatedly. However, every such actuating chan-

ges its structure to certain extent. We can detect by

timely varistor check whether is this change of structu-

re and resulting varistor function already beyond the

acceptable limit or not.

��Standard EN 62 305-4 requires besides others also

periodic overvoltage protections checks. This check is

usually completed with varistor measurement.

��On principle, the check of overvoltage protections is carried

out by connecting to the DC voltage, while increasing the

voltage to the point when current 1 mA fl ows through the

arrester. Subsequently the voltage level is deducted. This is

carried out repeatedly also for the opposite polarity.

��If the deducted voltage level is in between the Voltage

tolerance zone given in the table, the overvoltage pro-

tection is functional. In the opposite case it is necessary

to replace the overvoltage protection or its module. The

table of Voltage tolerance zones is given below.

Varistor function test

Minia

D23


RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS

Fig. 1. Overvoltage categories and impulse withstand voltage Uimp

(1.2/50 μs) for

individual parts of a building and for rated voltage 230/400 V a.c. – according to

EN 60664-1 equivalent IEC 664-1

lift

flats

appliances

1,5 kV1,5 kV

6 kV6 kV4 kV4 kV 2,5 kV2,5 kV

U(1

.2/5

0 μs

)im

p

Overvoltage category IV

Outside lead

Overvoltage category IIIFixed wiring

Overvoltagecategory II

Overvoltagecategory I

Appliances Light-current appliance

100 200 300350

t [μs]

20

15

7.5

25

50I,I

[kA]

imp

n

400

50 kA (10/350 s)μ

15 kA (8/20 μs)

Fig. 2. Wave form and energy 8/20 μs and 10/350 μs (the arrested energy corresponds

to the area below the curve)

General

��Protection of buildings and electrical equipment against

lightning eff ects and overvoltage is carried out both out-

side and inside the building. Еxternal protection devices

include lightning traps, conductor arresters, earthing sys-

tems, discharge arresters etc. internal protection measu-

res include equipotential bonding, screening etc.

��The basis of internal protection against lightning eff ects

and overvoltage is protective equipotential bonding,

i.e. connection of all metallic wiring to an equipoten-

tial EP busbar (EP – equipotential point). This elimina-

tes potential diff erences in the wiring over a permissi-

ble limit with subsequent damaging discharge.

��Lightning current arresters and surge voltage arresters are

the elements of internal protection. They connect power

cables to the EP busbar indirectly through arrester gaps

and varistors and thus reduce overvoltage. The overvol-

tage reduction is normally carried out in 3 stages, while

each stage has to reduce overvoltage. The degree of re-

duction is defi ned by overvoltage categories according to

EN 60664-1. The arrester stages 1 to 3 are installed on the

interface of individual overvoltage categories – see Fig. 1.

��Stage 1 – coarse protection – type 1

This protection is provided by lightning current arresters SJB,

which arrest the biggest part of the overvoltage wave, and

are able to divert lightning currents or their substantial parts

without damage. It is possible to deduct from EN 62305-4

that in the most adverse case with 2-wire power lead the li-

ghtning current arresters must arrest up to 50 kA per pole. In

case of 4-wire power lead it is 25 kA per pole of impulse current

with the waveform 10/350 μs. They can achieve these parame-

ters, because they are designed on the spark gap basis.

��1st + 2nd stage – compact combined arrester

– type 1 + type 2 +

SJBC devices are compact combined arresters of type 1 and

type 2. They provide advantages of rough and medium

protection stages described in the previous and subsequent

paragraphs in one device. The fi rst and second stages are based

on the arrester gap and varistor respectively. Their installation

in one base is possible thanks to the technology of electronic

ignition release.This solution will be used in case of placement

of the 1st and 2nd protection stages in one switchboard.

Also SVBC is part of this group. It is also combined arrester

type 1 and 2. However, both stages are varistor based. On the

contrary to SJBC the type SVBC can arrest lightning current

only half of the value. For most applications this „lower out-

put“ is suffi cient.

��Stage 2 – medium protection – type 2

This protection is provided by varistor-based surge voltage arresters

SVC and SVM, which are able to divert atmospheric surges or

overvoltage from switching processes in the network with wave

form 8/20 μs without damage. In most cases they are installed

after the lightning current arresters, which reduce overvoltage

and „cut off “ the energy of the overvoltage wave. In particular

applications it can be installed in the main switchboard even

without the back-up 1. protection stage. For more information on

the selection of optimal solution see table Selection of the number

of protection stages and types on the following page.

See Fig. 2 for comparison of the energies diverted by the

lightning current arrester 50 kA and surge voltage arrester

15 kA. Apparently, the value of pulse current is not suffi cient

to compare the output of overvoltage protections without the

information on test wave type.

Surge voltage arresters are rated for a specifi c heat output. If

there is high power or too frequent overvoltage in the network,

the heat output can be exceeded and the surge voltage arrester

is disconnected by its thermal disconnecting device. After dis-

connection the surge voltage arresters are non-functional and it

is necessary to replace them or their module. The disconnection

is indicated optically or also remotely.

The disconnection is indicated optically or remotely. At insu-

lation measurement it is necessary to disconnect the arresters

to get undistorted results.

��Stage 3 – fi ne protection – type 3

To ensure really reliable protection it is necessary to complement

the above stages 1 and 2 by the last stage – type 3 (SVD). The

basic elements of the fi ne protection are varistors and suppressor

diodes able to divert the overvoltage with wave form 8/20 μs. It

is recommended to install this protection directly at the protec-

ted appliance, without a long cable between the arrester and

the appliance. In case there is a long line between the last stage

and the appliance the voltage in the conductors could rise over

a permissible level (e.g. due to induction). We recommend to

install this stage of protection to the power outlets that feed the

overvoltage sensitive appliances (etc. electronics).

��Surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic system

The principle of devices protection in applications of photo-

voltaic sources (600/1000 V d.c.) is similar to the LV network

protection 230/400 V. It is mainly the reduction of energy of

overvoltage wave that is caused by lightning stroke or by

switching processes in the network. The overvoltage pro-

tection is usually installed at the solar panel. At the length

of the line between solar panels and inverter L > 10 m we

recommend to install the overvoltage protection also at the

inverter on the DC side.

Minia

D24



The design of overvoltage protection in a low-voltage distribution system is solved by the set of standards EN 62305. Firstly the zones of protection against lightning are determined, risk of damage, lightning protection level, values of lightning currents etc. Secondly the types of overvoltage protections are selected and their placing. The fi nal decision to undergo certain level of risk, however, is still in the hands of investors. In order to roughly determine what type of protection should be installed if any, you can follow this procedure.

It consists in two steps, in particular:1) Selection of the number of protection stages and types2) Selection of overvoltage protections

Note: recommended procedure can not cover all possible cases, it shows the basic logic to follow.

1) Selection of the number of protection stages and types – this is one of the main and the fi rst decisive criterion in designing overvoltage protection. In the table Selection

of the number of protection stages and types you should fi rst fi nd corresponding risk (high, medium or small) for the installation in the building, to be protected, and after it determine corresponding sensitivity (big, medium or small) of appliances which are installed in the building. The intersection gives the required information i.e. the number of stages and protection type. Note that the best and safest solution is installation of all three protection stages.

2) Selection of overvoltage protections

Selection of T1 and T2From the previous paragraph, the number of protection stages and types is known, and not it is necessary to determine specifi c products. If both T1 and T2 are selected for protection, use the table „Selection of overvoltage protections T1 and T2“ , which is divided by other important criteria, such as value of the quenching follow-current, network type etc. If protection T1 is not chosen, it is possible

to select protection T2 arbitrarily, depending on utilization properties of individual off ered types (SVC, SVM).

Selection of T3The arresters of the last stage are installed as close as possible to the end device. Should a long cable be installed between the last stage and the appliance, voltage could have rise over a permissible level (e.g. due to induction) in the conductors. It is not allowed to install T3 closer than 5 m from T2 due to coordination maintenance.

If the protected device is in the distance shorter than 10 m from the second stage, it is not necessary to install the third stage - the second stage will provide suffi cient protection.

The surge voltage arresters T3 must always be installed downstream of the surge voltage arrester T2. If the line continues farther, install another surge voltage arresters of stage 3 at least 10 m downstream of the previous T3.

Recommended procedure of design of overvoltage protection in low-voltage distribution system

Selection of the number of protection stages and types

INSTALLATION THREAT

BIG MEDIUM LOW

- buildings with external lightning protection (lightning

conductor), with grounded roof superstructure (aerial)

etc. classed in lightning protection level LPL I or LPL II

- buildings with external lightning protection (lightning

conductor), with grounded roof superstructure (aerial)

etc. classed in lightning protection level LPL III or LPL IV

- buildings without external lightning protection

(lightning conductor), without grounded roof

superstructure (aerial) etc.

or at the same time

- buildings with overhead cable lines - buildings with underground cable lines

or or

- Individual housing units, if there is not possible to

install common fi rst protection stage T1 in HDS or HR

- if there can be assumed such separation of light-

ning current into several branches that it will not

exceed 12.5 kA(10/350 us) per one conductor

- Individual housing units, if there is not possible to

install common fi rst protection stage T1 in house

main switchboard (HDS) or main switchboard (HR)

Big - PC, TV, Hi-Fi system etc. T1 (spark gap) + T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor) T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor) T2 (varistor) + T3 (varistor)

Medium - washing machines,

refrigerators etc. T1 (spark gap) + T2 (varistor) T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor) T2 (varistor)

Small - motors, fans etc. T1 (spark gap) +T 2 (varistor) T1 (varistor) + T2 (varistor) T2 (varistor)

Appl

ianc

e se

nsit

ivit

y to

ove

rvol

tage

Selection of overvoltage protections T1 and T2

Installation NetworkMAIN SWITCHBOARD

- as close as possible to the inlet of power lead into the buildingSUBDISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD

SUBDISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARD

- as close as possible to the protected device

threat type Protection type Recommended arrester type Protection

type Recommended arrester type Protection type Recommended arrester type

Low

TN-C T1 fi rst protection stage is not necessary T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

TN-C-S T1 fi rst protection stage is not necessary T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

TN-S, TT T1 fi rst protection stage is not necessary T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

Medium

TN-CT1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 2)

T3 SVD-253-1N-MZS / SVD-335-3N-MZS 3)

T1 + T2 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 -

TN-C-ST1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)


T1 + T2 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 -

TN-S, TTT1 SJB-25E-3N-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)


T1 + T2 3 ks SVBC-12,5-1 + 1 ks SVBC-50-N -

Big

TN-CT1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 2)


T1 + T2 SJBC-25E-3-MZS -

TN-C-ST1 SJB-25E-3-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)


T1 + T2 SJBC-25E-3-MZS -

TN-S, TTT1 SJB-25E-3N-MZS T2 SVC-350-3N-MZS / 3 ks SVC-275-1 + 1 ks SVC-255-N-S 2)


T1 + T2 SJBC-25E-3N-MZS -

Industrial

and special

applications1)

TN-CT1 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 T2 3 ks SVM-440-Z


T1+T2 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z -

TN-C-ST1 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 T2 3 ks SVM-440-Z + 1 ks SVM-NPE-Z


T1+T2 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z -

TN-S, TTT1 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 1 ks SJB-NPE-1,5 T2 3 ks SVM-440-Z + 1 ks SVM-NPE-Z


T1+T2 3 ks SJBplus-50-2,5 + 3 ks SVM-440-Z + SJB-NPE-1,5 -1) Higher requirements for overvoltage protection parameters (I

fi > 25 kA, two-conductor lead etc.)

2) SVC-350-... Can be used in immediate vicinity to SJB-25E-... When SVC-275-…is used, it is necessary to keep minimum mutual distance of lines 10 m.3) Type SVD-253-1N-MZS is intended for one-phase system, type SVD-335-3N-MZS for three-phase system.

Minia

D25



1. Installation of lightning current arresters – T1

Lightning current arresters, i.e. the arresters type 1, are installed mainly on the interface of zones LPZ0 / LPZ1. The main switchboard is usually placed on this interface. The devices are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35 (DIN rail). Installation of the lightning current arresters in metering switchboard shall be approved by relevant power distribu-tion companies. In not measured part, use the lightning current arresters SJBplus-... or SJB-25E-...

2. Installation of compact combined surge voltage arresters of type T1+T2

We recommend to install the compact combined arrester type 1 and 2 (SJBC = spark gap + varistor) in the main switchboard on „U“ rail type TH 35 in case it is possible to unite the bounda-ries of lightning protection levels LPZ0/LPZ1 and LPZ1/LPZ2. With its parameters and small dimensions, this combination is suitable for both industrial applications and applications in buildings, apartments etc.The advantage of combined arres-ters is that they provide complete solution for given system (etc. TN-C, TN-S) without the need of interconnecting busbars etc. - „one device = complete solution“.If it is not possible to unite the boundaries of lightning pro-tection levels LPZ0/LPZ1 and LPZ1/LPZ2 (etc. in block of fl ats - in the unmeasured part there can not be installed varistor based overvoltage protection, then type SJB-25E-... has to be used on the boundary of LPZ0/LPZ1 and type SVC-...on the boundary of LPZ1/LPZ2 Combined arrester of lightning current type 1 and type 2 (SVBC – varistor) can be used in switchboards of individual

fl ats in cases when it is not possible to install common fi rst protection stage (etc. block of fl ats, where there is not allo-wed to install in unmeasured part any type of overvoltage protection). Combined arrester of lightning current SVBC is thank to lightning current separation in several branches convenient protection for these applications. It is installed on „U“ rail type TH 35.

3. Installation of surge voltage arresters – T2Surge voltage arresters T2 are installed mainly on boundaries of LPZ1 / LPZ2, that means in subsidiary switchboard behind the arresters of lightning current installed in the main switchboard. They are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35. It is necessary to ensure coordination of individual protection stages at installation. For more information see paragraph “Coordination of overvoltage protection“.

4. Installation of surge voltage arresters – T3Surge voltage arresters T2 are installed on „U“ rail of type TH 35. If the length of the line between T2 and T3<5 m, it is not necessary to use T3 – the parameters of coordination T2 and T3 would not be fulfi lled. Protection is suffi ciently provided by the surge voltage arrester T2. If the line continues farther, install another surge voltage arresters of stage 3 at least 10 m downstream of the previous T3. Surge voltage arresters of stage 3 can be connected to the line both lengthwise, see Fig. 1 and cross-wise see Fig. 2. Cross-connection to the line is advantageous in particular if the current fl owing through the line is higher than the permitted rated load current I

L of the surge voltage

arrester T3.

5. Installation of surge voltage arresters for photovoltaic systems

Overvoltage protections SVF are installed on „U“ rail type TH 35 usually at the solar panel. At the length of the line be-tween solar panels and inverter L>10 m we recommend to install the overvoltage protection also at the inverter on the DC side.

1. Protection of lightning current arresters – T1

Protection can be implemented in two ways: �� protection only by fuses F1 in the service box, if F1

correspond to the values stated in the table of technical parameters of given type. However, if in such wiring there are leakages and follow short-circuit currents, though the SJB arresters are able to quench the follow short-circuit currents, F1 may blow with subsequent interruption of power supply in the building.�� use of fuses F2 in addition to F1 if the latter are too big

or if you do not want to interrupt the power supply. In such case selectivity must be ensured between F1 and F2 i.e. InF1

≥ 1,6xInF2 .With this ratio of rated currents, F2 will cut out sooner than F1, and the power supply of the building will not

be interrupted. However, the values InF2 may be low, and F2 will blow more frequently. For this reason it is recommended to equip the fuse F2 with a signalling device.

2. Protection of surge voltage arresters – T2The previous paragraph applies also to the protection of surge voltage arresters, however in Wiring diagram examples these fuses are designated F3.

3. Protection of surge voltage arresters – T3Surge voltage arresters SVD shall be protected by circuit breakers or fuses gG max. 25 A.

4. Protection of arresters for connection„3+1“Arresters for connection between N and PE conductors,

i.e. the arrester SJB-NPE-1.5 and the module between N and PE for the other versions are not protected separately. Because their protection is already provided by fuses F1, F2 or F3, see the wiring diagram examples.

5.Protection of arresters for photovoltaic systemsIt is not needed to protect the arrester for photovoltaic systems in any special way. However, in case of two varistors design and one spark gap the limit of maximum

short-circuit current has to be considered.

The correct function of multiple stage protection is conditioned by correct coordination of individual stages. At fi rst the most sensitive stage of protection reacts. Before it gets overloaded the superior stage has to react.

It is valid in case of T1 and T2 that if their mutual distance is bigger than 10 m (the length of conductors), the coordination is guaranteed by the physical features of the lines. It means that we can use any combination of fi rst and second protection stage (once we follow other installation instructions).

In case we need to install T2 closer to T1, it is necessary to use combination of overvoltage protection designed for this purpose:

It is necessary to observe the minimal distance 5 m for the coordination between the second end the third stages of the protection.

COORDINATION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION

INSTALLATION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS

PROTECTION OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONS

+

LNPE

F

LNPE

max

. 0.5

m

F

fi g. 1. Continuous connection

fi g. 2. Transversal connection

T1 T2

< 5 m 5 ÷ 10 > 10

SJBplus-50-2,5 SVM-440-.. SVC-350-.. arbitrary

SJB-25E-.. SVC-350-.. SVC-350-.. arbitrary

> 5 m

T2 T3

Minia

D26


RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONSLow installation threat

TN-C

TN-C-S

TN-S, TT

STANDARD SOLUTION ECONOMICAL SOLUTION

F1L1L2L3PEN

SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)

L1L2L3NPE

F1L1L2L3PEN

L1L2L3PEN

3 pcs SVC-275-1(38842)

SCV -275 SC V-275 SCV -275

F1L1L2L3

PEN

L1L2L3

PEN

SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)

F1L1L2L3N

L1L2L3PEN

3 pcs SVC-275-1(38842)

PE

F1L1L2L3

PEN

3 pcs SVC-275-1(38842)

1 pc SVC-255-N-S(38844)

L1L2L3

PEN

F2 if F1>125 A F2 if F1>125 A

F2 if F1>125 A F2 if F1>125 A

F2 if F1>125 A F2 if F1>125 A

F1L1L2L3PEN

L1L2L3PEN

SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)

SCV -275 SCV -275 SCV -275

SCV -275 SCV -275 SCV -275 SC V-255

G1L-50-16-L(39789)

G1L-65-16-L(39790)

G1L-50-16-L(39789)

a) Family houses without lightning conductor and exposed conductive parts

��Conducted by underground cable line.

��Where there is no threat of direct lightning stroke to the nearby building with lightning conductor which is galvanically

connected to the protected building.

b) Individual housing units

�� It is possible to install common fi rst protection stage T1 in the main switchboard in the block of fl ats.

Minia

D27



F1L1L2L3

PEN

F2 if F1 > 160 A

F2 if F1 > 315 A

F2 if F1 > 315 A

F2 if F1 > 315 A

F2 if F1 > 160 A F3 if F1 > 125 A

F3 if F1 > 125 A

F3 if F1 > 125 AF2 if F1 > 160 A

F1L1L2L3N

L1L2L3PEN

3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1(39027)

PE

1 pc SVBC-50-N(39004)

F1L1L2L3PEN

L ... arbitrary

L1L2L3

PEN

F1L1L2L3

PEN

L1L2L3

PEN

L ... arbitrary

G1L-50-16-L(39789)

G1L-65-16-L(39790)

L1L2L3

PEN

SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)

SJB-25E-3N-MZS(38358)

SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)

SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)

3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1(39027)

+

SJB-25-3N-MSZSJB-25-3N-MSZ

SVBC-12, 5 SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12, 5 SVBC-50

SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12,5

F1L1L2L3PEN

L1L2L3PE N

L ... arbitrary

SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)

SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)

F1L1L2L3PEN

L1L2L3PEN

G1L-50-16-L(39789)

3 pcs SVBC-12,5-1(39027)

SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12,5 SVBC-12, 5

Medium installation threat

TN-C

TN-C-S

TN-S, TT

a) Family houses

��Where there is a threat of direct lightning stroke to the protected building or to the nearby building with lightning conductor

which is galvanically connected to the protected building - level of protection against lightning LPL III or LPL IV.

��With overhead cable line.


��In the block of fl ats where it is not possible to install common fi rst protection stage T1 in the main switchboard and where

due to lightning current separation in several branches its level does not exceed 12.5 kA (10/350 μs).

STANDARD SOLUTION SOLUTION FOR NECESSARY SEPARATION OF T1 AND T2

Minia

D28


RECOMMENDATIONS FOR DESIGN, INSTALLATION AND MEASUREMENT OF OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTIONSBig installation threat

TN-C

TN-C-S

TN-S, TT

a) Family houses with lightning conductor or exposed conductive

parts

��Independent on connection type.

��Where there is a threat of direct lightning stroke to the protected

building or to the nearby building with lightning conductor which is

galvanically connected to the protected building - level of protection

against lightning LPL I or LPL II.


��In the block of fl ats where it is not possible to install common fi rst

protection stage T1 in the main switchboard and where the

lightning current can exceed 12.5 kA (10/350 μs).


F1L1L2L3N

L1L2L3PEN

PE

F1L1L2L3

PEN

L1L2L3

PEN

SJBC-25E-3N-MZS(38362)

SJBC-25E-3-MZS(38361)

F2 if F1 > 315 A

F2 if F1 > 315 A

F1L1L2L3PEN

L ... arbitrary

F1L1L2L3

PEN

L ... arbitrary

SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)

SJB-25E-3N-MZS(38358)

SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)

SVC-350-3N-MZ(38367)

F2 if F1 > 315 A

F2 if F1 > 315 A

F3 if F1 > 125 A

F3 if F1 > 125 A

L1L2L3

PEN

L1L2L3

PEN

SJB-25-3N-MSZSJB-25-3N-MSZ

F1L1L2L3PEN

L1L2L3PEN

SJBC-25E-3-MZS(38361)

F2 if F1 > 315 A F1L1L2L3PEN

L ... arbitrary

SJB-25E-3-MZS(38357)

SVC-350-3-MZ(38365)

F2 if F1 > 315 A if F1 > 125 AF3L1L2L3PEN

Minia

D29



T1+T2

Industrial and special applications

T1+T2

a) Industrial applications, where higher requirements for

overvoltage protections have to be met, e.g. due to high short-

circuit current

��The separation of lightning current is the same as in case of big

installation threat.

b) Buildings with two-conductor lead fulfi l the parameters of group

big installation threat

F1L1L2L3

PEN

+1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5

(34716)

3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)

+

3 pcs SVM-440-Z(34720)

F1L1L2L3PEN

L1L2L3

PEN

L1L2L3PEN

G1L-1000-16-L(39788)

G1L-1000-16-L(39788)

3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)

+3 pcs SVM-440-Z

(34720)

SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)

+

SVM-440-Z(34720)

F1L1PEN

L1PEN

F1L1L2L3

PEN

+1 pc SJB-NPE-1,5

(34716)

3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5 (39227)

3 pcsSVM-440-Z(34720)

F1L1L2L3PEN

L1L2L3

PEN

L1L2L3PEN

G1L-1000-16-L(39788)

G1L-1000-16-L(39788)

3 pcs SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)

+

3 pcs SVM-440-Z(34720)

SJBplus-50-2,5(39227)

SVM-440-Z(34720)

F1L1PEN

L1PEN

G1L-50-16-L(39789)

G1L-65-16-L(39790)

F2 if F1 > 125 A F3 if F1 > 125 A

F3 if F1 > 125 A

F3 if F1 > 125 A

F2 if F1 > 500 A

F2 if F1 > 500 A

F2 if F1 > 500 A

F2 if F1 > 125 A

F2 if F1 > 125 A

3 pcs SVM-NPE-Z(34723)

TN-C

TN-S

TN-C


Minia

D30



Max. operating voltage Uc = 1000 V

Photovoltaic systems

a) Photovoltaic sources up to 1000 V d.c.

��Where there is no threat of direct stroke to the solar panel or lines.

��Dependent on the length of line between the panels and the inverter one or two devices are used. In general, at the length

of line L1 > 10 m we use the overvoltage protection at both the solar panel and the inverter, at the length of the line

L ≤ 10 m we use the overvoltage protection either at the solar panel or at the inverter.

��Versions for 1000 V d.c. and 600 V d.c.

DC Switch-disconnector

AC Switch

-disconnectorConverterMeasuring

Protection against

overvoltage

Protection against

overvoltage

Protection against

overvoltage

Photovoltaic arraySwitchboard MeasuringMain switch

-disconnector

Transformer

L1

hWhW

DC AC

Main

protection

Max. operating voltage Uc = 600 V

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

SVF-1000-V SVF-1000-B SVF-1000- V

L+ L-

U 2,5kVI 15kA

p

n

U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

U 2,5kVI 15kA

p

n

PE

L-L+L-

L1 10m≤

L+

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

SVF-1000-V SVF-1000-B SVF-1000- V

L+ L-

U 2,5kVI 15kA

p

n

U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

U 2,5kVI 15kA

p

n

L+L-

L+L-

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

SVF-1000-V SVF-1000- B S VF-1000- V

L+ L-

U 2,5kVI 15kA

p

n

U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

U 2,5kVI 15kA

p

n

L1 > 10 m

PE PE

S(3 )

VF-1000-2VB-MZ9165

S(3 )

VF-1000-2VB-MZ9165

S(3 )

VF-1000-2VB-MZ9165

L+L-

L+L-

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

SVF-600- V SVF-600-B SVF-600- V

L+ L-

U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

� U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

� U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

�

L1 10m≤

PE

L+L-

L+L-

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

SVF-600- V SVF-600-B SVF-600- V

L+ L-

U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

� U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

� U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

�

SVF-1000-2VB-MZ

SVF-600- V SVF-600-B SVF-600- V

L+ L-

U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

� U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

� U 3kVI 15kA

p

n

�

L1> 10m

PE PE

S(3 )

VF-600-3V-MZ9528

S(3 )

VF-600-3V-MZ9528

S(3 )

VF-600-3V-MZ9528

Minia

E

��Installation relays......................................................................................................................E2

��Installation contactors............................................................................................................E4

��Priority current relays............................................................................................................. E11

��Multiple-function time relays............................................................................................. E13

��Time relays..................................................................................................................................... E17

��Impulse memory relay............................................................................................................. E20

��Stair switches................................................................................................................................ E24

��Timers............................................................................................................................................... E27

��Tumbler power switches........................................................................................................ E29

��Tumbler switches........................................................................................................................ E35

��Rocker-type switches and change-over switches.................................................... E38

��Push-button switches.............................................................................................................. E40

��Control push-buttons................................................................................................................ E42

��Signal lights................................................................................................................................... E45

��Electric bells and buzzers....................................................................................................... E47

��Power supplies............................................................................................................................. E48

��Socket outlets.............................................................................................................................. E51

��Interconnecting busbars........................................................................................................ E52

��Terminal extensions................................................................................................................. E57

��Terminal board............................................................................................................................ E59

OTHER DEVICES

Minia

E2

Other devices

Installation relays RPR-16-..

��For switching of electric appliances up to 16 A – electric

boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves,

lighting etc.

��For automation purposes in connection with a multiple-

-function time relay MCR, impulse relay MIR, priority

relay RLP, signal light MKA, program timer MAP, MAR,

tumbler switches MSP, control push-buttons MTX etc.

��Light indication at power up.

��Noiseless switching.

��Contacts: 1 make-and-break.

��Control voltage: 24 V a.c./d.c.; 230 V a.c.

��There is ensured such electrical isolation between the

control circuit (coil) and main circuit (contact) as it is

between inlet and outlet lead of the safety transfor-

mer.

Rated voltage Colour Type Product Number Weight PackageU

c of indication code of modules [kg] [pcs]

24 V a.c. / d.c., 230 V a.c.red RPR-16-001-X230-SC 35668 1 0.07 1green RPR-16-001-X230-SE 35669 1 0.07 1

Rated voltage Colour Type Product Number Weight PackageU

c of indication code of modules [kg] [pcs]

24 V a.c. / d.c., 230 V a.c.red RPR-08-002-X230-SC 35670 1 0.07 1green RPR-08-002-X230-SE 35671 1 0.07 1

Installation relays RPR-08-...


boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves,

lighting etc.

��For automation purposes in connection with a multiple-

-function time relay MCR, impulse relay MIR, priority

relay RLP, signal light MKA, program timer MAP, MAR,

tumbler switches MSP, control push-buttons MTX etc.

��Light indication at power up.

��Noiseless switching.

��Contacts: 2 make-and-break.

��Control voltage: 24 V a.c./d.c.; 230 V a.c.

��There is ensured such electrical isolation between the

control circuit (coil) and main circuit (contact) as it is

between inlet and outlet lead of the safety transfor-

mer.

INSTALLATION RELAYS

Minia

E3

Other devices

INSTALLATION RELAYS

Dimensions

17.5 17.5

35~88

24~4.5

44

62 2

45 65.5 86

14

A3

12

A2A1

111214

A2A3

11

A1

2224

21

RPR-16-.. RPR-08-..

Diagram

RPR-16... RPR-08...

A1 A3

A2 11

12 14 A1 A3 12 14

A2 1121

22 24

Type RPR-16-... RPR-08-...

Standards EN 60669-2-2 EN 60669-2-2

Approval marks

Main circuit (contact)



eAC-1 250 V a.c. / 16 A 250 V a.c. / 8 A

DC-1 24 V d.c. / 16 A 30 V d.c. / 8 A

Max. switched power AC 4000 VA 2000 VA

DC 384 W 240 W

Min. voltage / current 5 V d.c. / 100 mA -

Signalling at power up red / green LED red / green LED

Mechanical endurance 20 000 000 operating cycles 5 000 000 operating cycles

Electrical endurance 50 000 operating cycles (AC), 30 000 (DC) 100 000 operating cycles

Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2



Rated voltage Uc

terminals A1, A2 24 V a.c./d.c. 24 V a.c./d.c.

terminals A2, A3 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Input power at Uc 24 V a.c. 0.42 VA 0.32 VA

Uc 24 V d.c. 0.43 W 0.35 W

Uc 230 V a.c. 5.5 VA 5.5 VA

Rated frequency fn

50 Hz 50 Hz

Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2


Other data

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35


Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 55 °C -20 ÷ + 55 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Specifi cations

Minia

E4

Other devices

Installation contactors 20 A

Arrangement Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight Packageof contacts 1) U


10 230 V a.c. RSI-20-10-A230 36609 1 0.13 1

20230 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A230 36610 1 0.13 124 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A024 36614 1 0.13 1

11230 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A230 36611 1 0.13 124 V a.c. RSI-20-11-A024 36615 1 0.13 1

02230 V a.c. RSI-20-02-A230 36612 1 0.13 124 V a.c. RSI-20-02-A024 36616 1 0.13 1

1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts




40230 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A230 36617 2 0.23 124 V a.c. RSI-25-40-A024 36621 2 0.23 1

31230 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A230 36618 2 0.23 124 V a.c. RSI-25-31-A024 36622 2 0.23 1

04 230 V a.c. RSI-25-04-A230 36620 2 0.23 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts




40230 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A230 36625 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-40-40-A024 36629 3 0.38 1

31230 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A230 36626 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-40-31-A024 36630 3 0.38 1





40230 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A230 36633 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A024 36637 3 0.38 1

31230 V a.c. RSI-63-31-A230 36634 3 0.38 124 V a.c. RSI-63-31-A024 36638 3 0.38 1


Installation contactors

��For switching of appliances up to 63 A – electric boilers,

direct heating convectors, accumulator stoves,

lighting etc.

��Control voltage: 24 V a.c., 230 V a.c.

��Visual light indication at power up.

��Decreased switching noise and vibration.��

INSTALLATION CONTACTORS

Minia

E5

Other devices

Installation contactors with manual control


boilers, direct heating convectors, accumulator sto-

ves, lighting etc.

��Control voltage: 24, 230 V a.c.

��Visual light indication at power up.

��Decreased switching noise and vibration.

��They are equipped with change-over switch with three

positions:��- position „AUTO“ – common function of the contactor

- position „I“ – make contacts close and break con-

tacts open. If rated voltage Uc is applied on the

contactor coil, the switch will go to position

„AUTO“

- position „O“ – contactor coil circuit is interrupted




20230 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A230-M 36641 1 0.135 124 V a.c. RSI-20-20-A024-M 36643 1 0.135 1


















40 230 V a.c. RSI-63-40-A230-M 36653 3 0.39 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts


Minia

E6

Other devices

Auxiliary switch

��For signalling the main contact position of installation

contactors.

��Installation: by means of plastic latches on the right side

of the installation contactor.

��It is possible to mount one auxiliary switch on one

installation contactor.

��Width: 9 mm.

Accessories

Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package

of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

11 PS-RSI-1100 36657 0.5 0.03 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts


Minia

E7

Other devices


Working position

0°

180°

Specifi cations

Dependency on ambient temperature��If several contactors are installed in parallel in a switchboard, the following rules shall apply:

- installation contactors RSI-25-.., RSI-40-.. RSI-63-.. can be installed in parallel without limitation up to ambient

temperature of 55°C

- for installation contactor RSI-20-.. at ambient temperature up to 40 °C, a 0.5 gap must be left after every third

contactor. At ambient temperature between 40 °C and 55 °C a gap of 0.5 module must be left after every second

contactor

Type RSI-20-... RSI-25-... RSI-40-... RSI-63-... PS-RSI-1100

Standards EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-4-1 EN 60947-5-1

EN 61095 EN 61095 EN 61095 EN 61095

Approval marks

Contacts

Arrangement of contacts 1) 10, 20, 11, 02 40, 31, 04 40, 31, 04 40, 31, 04 11

Rated thermal current Ith

20 A 25 A 40 A 63 A 6 A


230 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Rated operating current Ie

AC-1 230 V a.c. 20 A 25 A 40 A 63 A -

DC-1

24 V d.c. 20 A 25 A 40 A 63 A -

110 V d.c. 1 A 2 A 4 A 4 A -

220 V d.c. 0,5 A 0,5 A 0,8 A 0,8 A -

AC-15230 V a.c. 6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A 6 A

400 V a.c. 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A 4 A

Switched powerAC-1 / AC –7a

230 V a.c. 4 kW 9 kW 16 kW 24 kW -

400 V a.c. - 16 kW 26 kW 40 kW -

AC-3 / AC –7b230 V a.c. 1.3 kW 2) 2.2 kW 5.5 kW 8.5 kW -

400 V a.c. - 4 kW 11 kW 15 kW -

Min. switched power 17 V / 50 mA 17 V / 50 mA 17 V / 50 mA 17 V / 50 mA 12 V / 10 mA

Switching frequency max. 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h 600 operating cycles/h

Electrical endurance at Ie

AC-1 / AC-7a 200 000 operating cycles 200 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles -

AC-3 / AC-7b 300 000 operating cycles 500 000 operating cycles 150 000 operating cycles 150 000 operating cycles -

Mechanical endurance 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles 3 000 000 operating cycles

Power loss at Ie per pole 1,7 VA 2,2 VA 4 VA 8 VA -

Short-circuit protection - fuse gG 20 A 35 A 63 A 80 A 6 A

Coordination type 1 1 1 1 1

Min. distance between open contacts 3.6 mm 3.6 mm 3.4 mm 3.4 mm 4 mm

Make time 3) 15 ÷ 25 ms (10 ms) 10 ÷ 20 ms (10 ms) 15 ÷ 20 ms (5 ÷ 10 ms) 15 ÷ 20 ms (5 ÷ 10 ms) -

Break time 3) 20 ms (20 ÷ 25 ms) 20 ms (25 ÷ 30 ms) 10 ms (10 ÷ 15 ms) 10 ms (10 ÷ 15 ms) -

Connection – conductor rigid 1 ÷ 10 mm2 1 ÷ 10 mm2 1 ÷ 25 mm2 1 ÷ 25 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2

Connection – conductor rigid with a sleeve 1 ÷ 6 mm2 1 ÷ 6 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1 ÷ 16 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2

Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 2 Nm 2 Nm 0.6 Nm


Rated voltage Uc

24, 230 V a.c. 24, 230 V a.c. 24, 230 V a.c. 24, 230 V a.c. -

Operating range 85 ÷ 110 % 85 ÷ 110 % 85 ÷ 110 % 85 ÷ 110 % -

Rated frequency 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz -

Power loss - at operation 4) 15 VA / 13 W 27 VA / 17 W 62 VA / 50 W 62 VA / 50 W -

(6 VA / 3.8 W) (5.2 VA / 2 W) (15.4 VA / 6 W) (15.4 VA / 6 W)

Power loss – holding 3 VA / 1.9 W 2.6 VA / 1 W 7.7 VA / 3W 7.7 VA / 3W -

Connection – conductor rigid 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 -

Connection – conductor rigid with a sleeve 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 1 ÷ 2.5 mm2 -

Torque 0.6 Nm 0.6 Nm 0.6 Nm 0.6 Nm -

Other data

Rated insulation voltage Ui

440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 440 V a.c. 500 V a.c.

Rated impulse voltage Uimp

4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV 4 kV

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 -

Degree of protection IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20 IP20

Ambient temperature -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C -5 ÷ + 55 °C

Seismic resistance IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5) IEC 980:1993 5)

1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Only for making contact3) Values in parentheses are valid for break-type contact4) Values in parentheses are valid for installation contactors with manual control with switch in position „I“5) It passed the seismic tests for NPP Dukovany and Temelín

Minia

E8

Other devices


Switching of resistance or slightly inductive load in DC circuits (utilization category DC-1)

Installation contactor Contact load

Type Operating voltage Ue 1 contact 2 contacts in series 3 contacts in series 4 contacts in series

RSI-20-...24 V d.c. 20 A 20 A - -

110 V d.c. 1 A 3 A - -220 V d.c. 0.5 A 1.5 A - -

RSI-25-...24 V d.c. 25 A 25 A 25 A 25 A

110 V d.c. 2 A 4 A 6 A 8 A220 V d.c. 0.5 A 1.5 A 2.5 A 3.5 A

RSI-40-...24 V d.c. 40 A 40 A 40 A 40 A

110 V d.c. 4 A 10 A 30 A 40 A220 V d.c. 0.8 A 6 A 20 A 40 A

RSI-63-...24 V d.c. 63 A 63 A 63 A 63 A

110 V d.c. 4 A 10 A 35 A 63 A220 V d.c. 0.8 A 6 A 30 A 63 A

Switching of lights - maximum number of light fi ttings per one contact at 230 V a.c., 50 Hz (utilization category AC-5a, AC-5b)

Light bulbs

Installation contactor Lighting fi tting

Type 60 W 100 W 200 W 500 W 1000 W

RSI-20-... 23 14 7 3 1RSI-25-... 29 16 8 3 1RSI-40-... 65 40 20 8 4RSI-63-... 85 50 25 10 5

Fluorescent tubes

Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallel Duo connection

Type 18 W 36 W 58 W 18 W / 4,5 μF 36 W / 4,5 μF 58 W / 7 μF 2x 18 W 2x 36 W 2x 58 W

RSI-20-... 22 17 14 7 7 4 30 17 10RSI-25-... 24 20 17 8 8 5 40 24 14RSI-40-... 90 65 45 48 48 31 100 65 40RSI-63-... 140 95 70 73 73 47 150 95 60

Fluorescent tubes with electronic ballast (ECG)

Installation contactor Lighting fi tting

Type 18 W 36 W 58 W 2x 18 W 2x 36 W 2x 58 W

RSI-20-... 25 15 14 12 7 7RSI-25-... 35 20 19 17 10 9RSI-40-... 100 52 50 50 26 25RSI-63-... 140 75 72 70 38 36

High-pressure mercury discharge lamps (HQL)

Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallel

Type 50 W 80 W 125 W 250 W 400 W 700 W 1000 W 50 W/7 μF 80 W/8 μF 125 W/10 μF 250 W/18 μF 400 W/25 μF 700 W/45 μF 1000 W/60 μF

RSI-20-... 14 10 7 4 2 1 1 4 4 3 1 1 0 0RSI-25-... 18 13 9 5 3 2 1 5 5 4 2 1 0 0RSI-40-... 38 29 20 10 7 4 3 31 27 22 12 9 5 4RSI-63-... 55 42 29 15 10 6 4 47 41 33 18 13 7 5

Metal halide discharge lamps (HQI)

Installation contactor Uncompensated Compensated in parallelType 70 W 150 W 250 W 400 W 1000 W 2000 W 70 W/12 μF 150 W/20 μF 250 W/33 μF 400 W/35 μF 1000 W/95 μF 2000 W/148 μF

RSI-20-... 10 5 3 3 1 0 2 1 0 0 0 0RSI-25-... 12 7 4 3 1 0 3 1 1 0 0 0RSI-40-... 23 12 7 6 2 1 18 11 6 6 2 1RSI-63-... 32 18 10 9 3 1 25 15 9 8 3 2

Minia

E9

Other devices


High-pressure sodium discharge lamps (NAV)


Type 150 W 250 W 400 W 1000 W 150 W / 20 μF 250 W / 33 μF 400 W / 48 μF 1000 W / 106 μF

RSI-20-... 5 3 2 0 1 0 0 0RSI-25-... 6 4 2 1 1 1 0 0RSI-40-... 17 10 6 3 11 6 4 2RSI-63-... 22 13 8 3 16 10 6 3

Low-pressure sodium discharge lamps


Type 18 W 35 W 55 W 90 W 135 W 180 W 18 W / 5 μF 35 W / 20 μF 55 W / 20 μF 90 W / 26 μF 135 W / 45 μF 180 W / 40 μF

RSI-20-... 22 7 7 7 3 3 6 1 1 1 - -RSI-25-... 27 9 9 5 4 4 7 1 1 1 - -RSI-40-... 71 23 23 14 10 10 44 11 11 8 4 5RSI-63-... 90 30 30 19 13 13 66 16 16 12 7 8

Dimensions

45 90

44

64

9

17.5

45 90

44

64

7

4.5

35 447

64

45 90

4.5

54 447

64

45 90

4.5

RSI-20-.. RSI-25-..

RSI-40-... RSI-63-.. PS-RSI-1100

Minia

E10

Other devices

INSTALLATION CONTACTORSDiagram

RSI-20-10-.. RSI-20-02-..

RSI-25-40-.., RSI-40-40-.., RSI-63-40-.. RSI-25-31-.., RSI-40-31-.., RSI-63-31-.. RSI-25-04-.., RSI-40-04-.., RSI-63-04-..

2

1

A2

A1

A2

A1

842 6

1 3 75

A2

A1

42 6

531

R8A2

A1 R7

R8R2 R4 R6

R7R5R3R1

A2

A1

PS-RSI-1100

44

43

32

31

RSI-20-20-. .

42

1 3

A2

A1

RSI-20-11-..

R42

1 R3A1

A2 R4R2

R1 R3

Minia

E11

Other devices

��They monitor the strength of current in the circuit and

close/open the contact (terminals 1, 2) at a jump ex-

ceeding of a guaranteed switched current.

��They make it possible to interrupt the power supply

of one (non-priority) circuit, if the current of the other

(priority) circuit jumps to a set value.

��They are most frequently installed in distribution

systems where concurrent operation of more

appliances is not possible because of risk of exceeding

a permitted power input.

��For example, the relays can disconnect electric heating,

a storage block heater from the network if an

instantaneous water heater is switched – therefore

it is possible to select a main circuit breaker and

conductors for a lower power input.

��They make it possible to increase the number

of appliances for existing installations.

��In the circuits with electronic (e.g. thyristor) control,

they cannot be used directly, but with a time-delay

relay – see connection examples.

��Maximum current through the current coil: depending

on design (15 A, 28 A, 63 A).

��Maximum current through the contact: 16 A.

Operating current Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Packagerange I

nof contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

5 ÷ 15 A01 RLP-15-01 35548 1 0.115 110 RLP-15-10 35549 1 0.115 1

10 ÷ 28 A01 RLP-28-01 35550 1 0.115 110 RLP-28-10 35551 1 0.115 1

26 ÷ 63 A01 RLP-63-01 35552 1 0.115 110 RLP-63-10 35553 1 0.115 1


RLP selection-.. according to power output of the switched appliance

Appliance type RLP-..Voltage Power output [kW]

230 V a.c.1.2 ÷ 3.4 RLP-15-..2.3 ÷ 6.4 RLP-28-..

6.0 ÷ 14.5 RLP-63-..

400 V a.c.3.4 ÷ 10.0 RLP-15-..6.9 ÷ 19.3 RLP-28-..

18.0 ÷ 43.5 RLP-63-..

Type RLP-..

Approval marks

Contact (terminals 1,2)

Arrangement of contacts 1) 10, 01

Rated voltage/current AC-1 Ue/I

n 250 V a.c. / 16 A


Switching frequency max. 1200 operating cycles/h

Connection 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2

Torque 0.8 Nm

Current coil (terminals A1, A2)

Operating current range In 5 ÷ 15 A, 10 ÷ 28 A, 26 ÷ 63 A

Guaranteed switched current for In 2) range 5 ÷ 15 ≥ 5 A

range 10 ÷ 28 ≥ 10 A

range 26 ÷ 63 ≥ 26 A

Guaranteed unswitched current for In

2) range 5 ÷ 15 ≤ 2 A

range 10 ÷ 28 ≤ 6 A

range 26 ÷ 63 ≤ 16 A

Connection - terminals A1, A2 0.75 ÷ 16 mm2

Torque 2 Nm

Power loss 3 W

Other data

Isolation voltage Ui

400 V a.c.




Working position arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Only for jump increase in current

Specifi cations

PRIORITY CURRENT RELAYS

Minia

E12

Other devices

PRIORITY CURRENT RELAYS

��For example, at blocking of consumption of an electric heater (a non-

priority appliance) the current coil (terminals A1, A2) is connected

in the circuit of an instantaneous water heater (a priority appliance)

at switching the latter on, and control contact (terminals 1, 2) is

connected in the circuit of the electric heater contactors. So if the

instantaneous water heater is switched on and the current steeply

reaches so called “guaranteed switched current”, the control break

contact will interrupt the power supply of contactor, and subsequently

disconnects the electric boiler.

Dimensions

17.5 4.5 44

62

45 85.8

A2

2

1

A1

RLP-..

Diagram

RLP-..-10

I>

2

1

A2

A1

RLP-..-01

I>

2

1

A2

A1

Connection examples

Instantaneous

water heater

Electric

heater

N NL L1 L2 L3

A1

A2 2

1

842 6

1 3 75

A2

A1

RLP-...-01

RSI-...-40

-...

L

I>

MCR

-08-00

1-UNI

N NL L1 L2 L3

A1

A2 2

1

842 6

1 3 75

A2

A1

RLP-...-10

RSI-...-40

-...

L

I>

TA1

A2

T

1816

15

N L

Load with

electronic control

Electric

heater

��At priority switching of an appliance with electronic control the relay function is troubled

(the relay is synchronized with the electronic control). For this reason it is recommended

to connect a time-delay relay in the control contact circuit.

Minia

E13

Other devices

Multiple-function time relays

��For switching of electric circuits up to 8 A depending

on the set time, function and connection.

��Mainly for automation purposes.

��They can be used as a stair switch.

��Time range: 0.1 s ÷ 100 h.

��Big number of functions with various control options:

delayed operation, impulse after switching on, interval

relay beginning with a pause/impulse, reaction

to leading/trailing edge, reaction to connection/

disconnection of supply voltage, reaction only to

a control impulse edge, ...

��Supply voltage: 230 V a.c. or universal

(12 ÷ 230 V a.c./d.c.).

��Time and function setting by knobs and change-over

switches on the front panel of the device.

��Light indication at contact closing 15-18.

��Light indication of presence of supply voltage.

��Each impulse led on input T causes restart of timing

depending on the set function.

Rated voltage Type Product Number Weight PackageU

ncode of modules [kg] [pcs]

230 V a.c. MCR-08-001-A230 35568 1 0.115 1universal 1) MCR-08-001-UNI 35569 1 0.115 11) Universal rated voltage = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c.



OD-MIR-BK 35676 1 0.05 1

Accessories

Compensation block

��it enables control of the relay by 1 to 3 control push-

buttons with glow discharge tube.

��Connection: parallel with MCR.

��Rated voltage: 230 V a.c.

��Max. voltage : 400 V a.c.

��Capacity: 3 x 1 μF.

MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYS

Minia

E14

Other devices


Change-over switch Un and TL

� for setting of starting method:

Un – relay starts at connection of supply voltage or

application of impulse on T terminal

TL – relay starts by impulse application on terminal T

Change-over switch and

� for setting of response to control impulse edge

leading edge of the control impulse

trailing edge of the control impulse

Change-over switches IZ/ZP and MON/AST

� for function setting (for function table see page E16)

IZ – impulse after switching on

ZP – delayed operation

MON – monostable function

AST – astable function

Control knobs

� for switching time setting

upper dial – defi nes time range – 1 s, 10 s, 1 min, 10 min,

1 hour, 10 hours, 100 hours

lower dial – for setting of a multiple of the time range

(0.05 ÷ 1)

minimum set time: 0.1 s

maximum set time: 100 h

Terminals A1-A2 for connection of supply voltage

� Rated voltage Un = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c. or 230 V a.c.

� In AC circuits L and N conductors can be arbitrarily

connected to terminals A1, A2.

In DC circuits the (+) conductor must be connected

to terminal A1, and (-) to terminal A2.

Terminal T for control of relay

� Control impulse can be excited by connection of A1-T.

� Min./max. excitation time: 15 ms/compensated.

� The relay can be controlled by 1 to 3 control push-buttons

with a glow discharge tube provided a power-factor ca-

pacitor 3 μF / 400 V is connected between terminals A2-T

- see connection diagram. For compensation it is possible

to use the compensation block OD-MIR-BK.

Indication

� indication of operational states is solved by two-colour LED

– presence of supply voltage Un is indicated by green

colour

– presence of supply voltage Un and closed contact 15-18 R

e

is indicated by orange colour

Description

T

A1 A2

16

1815

T

L N

M R- -001-C 08 UNI

A2

OD-MIR-BK

��

Minia

E15

Other devices


Specifi cations

Type MCR-08-001-...


Approval marks




250 V a.c., 24 V d.c.

Rated current In

8 A

Max. switched power 2000 VA / 192 W

Max. switched voltage 380 V a.c. / 150 d.c.

Min. voltage / current 5 V d.c. / 10 mA

Mechanical endurance 5 000 000 operating cycles



Torque 0.5 Nm

Control circuit

Rated voltage Un

type MCR-08-001-A230 230 V

type MCR-08-001-UNI 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / d.c.

Dwell between applied Un

0.1 s

Consumption at Un

at 12 / 230 V a.c. 0.7 VA / 2.1 VA

at 12 / 230 V d.c. 0.9 W / 1.2 W

Rated frequency 50 Hz


Torque 0.5 Nm

Control impulse

Excitation 2) through interconnection of A1-T

Min. excitation time 15 ms

Max. excitation time compensated

Consumption at Un

at 12 /230 V a.c. 0.5 VA / 0.5 VA

at 12 / 220 V d.c. 1 W / 1 W

Time circuit

Range 0.1 s ÷ 100 hours

t setting method control knobs on the front panel

Stability of set value at permanent power supply max. 2 % t

Other data



Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 50 °C

Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) The relay can be controlled by 1 to 3 control push-buttons with a glow discharge tube provided a power-factor capacitor 3 μF / 400 V is connected between terminals A2-T. For compensation it is possible to use so called “Compensation block OD-MIR-BK” (1 module on DIN rail).

Dimensions

17.5

~88

2

45 65.5 86

24

44

62

~4.5

18

T

16

A2A1

15

17.5

~88

24~4.5

44

62

45 65.5 86

A2A2A2

MCR-08-001-.. OD-MIR-BK

Minia

E16

Other devices

MULTIPLE-FUNCTION TIME RELAYSDiagram

MCR

TA1

A2

T

1816

15

A2

OD-MIR-BK

Graph

Minia

E17

Other devices

��Terminal ZP for setting of relay start

- If the terminal is not interconnected, the relay starts

in the mode of impulse after switching.

- If the terminal is interconnected with terminal A1, the

relay starts in delayed operation mode.

��Indication

- Indication of operational states is solved by two-colour LED

- presence of supply voltage Un is indicated by

green colour

- presence of supply voltage Un and closed

contact 15-18 Re is indicated by orange colour

��Terminals A1-A2 for connection of supply voltage

- Rated voltage Un = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷ 220 V d.c.

- Conductor L and N or (+) and (-) can be connected

arbitrarily to terminals A1, A2.

��Control knobs and change-over switches t1 , t

2

for switching time setting:

- Minimum set time t1 or t

2: 0,5 s.

- Maximum set time t1 or t

2: 120 min.

- Stability of set value of t1 and t

2 at permanent power

supply - max 2 % t1 or t

2 .

- Scale of both t1 and t

2 is linear.

�

��For periodical switching of electrical circuits up to 8 A

according to two mutually independent set times.

��Mainly for automation purposes.

��Time range: 0.5 s ÷ 120 min.

��Universal supply voltage:

12 V ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 V ÷ 220 V d.c.

��Possibility of selection of start of timing – delayed

operation/impulse after switching on.

��Light indication at contact closing (red LED).

��Light indication of presence of supply voltage (green

LED).

Description

Time relays

Rated voltage Un


AC/DC [V] code of modules [kg] [pcs]

Universal 1) MTR-08-001-UNI 35570 1 0.075 1

t , t1 2t , t1 2

0,5 s 12 s

12

5 s 120 s

12

0,5 min 12 min

12

5 min 120 min

12

1) Universal rated voltage = 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷220 V d.c.

TIME RELAYS

Minia

E18

Other devices

TIME RELAYS

Type MTR-08-001-UNI


Approval marks



Rated operating voltage Ue 250 V a.c. / 24 V d.c.

Rated current In 8 A

Max. switched power 2000 VA / 192 W

Max. switched voltage 380 V a.c., 150 V d.c.

Min. voltage/current 5 V d.c. / 10 mA

Endurance - electrical/mechanical 100 000 operating cycles/5 000 000 operating cycles


Torque 0.5 Nm


Rated control voltage Un 12 ÷ 230 V a.c. / 12 ÷ 220 V d.c.

Dwell between applied Ue

3 s

Consumption at Ue

12/230 V a.c. 0.7 VA / 2.1 VA

12/220 V d.c. 0.9 W / 1.2 W

Rated frequency 50 ÷ 60 Hz


Torque 0.5 Nm

Time circuit

Range 0.5 s ÷ 120 min

T setting method t1, t

2control knobs and switches on the front panel

Stability of set value at permanent power supply max. 2 % t1, t

2

Other data




Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Specifi cations

Dimensions

17.5

~88

24~4.5

44

62 2

45 65.5 86

18

ZP

16

A2A1

15

MTR-08-001-UNI

Minia

E19

Other devices

TIME RELAYS

Diagram

MTR-08-001-UNI

ZPA1

A2

1816

15

T

Graph

L LN N

Un Un

Re Re

t1 t1t1 t1t1 t1t1 t1t1 t1t2 t2t2 t2t2 t2t2 t2t2 t2

Un – rated voltage

Re – contact closing 15-18

t1 – set time on the switch t t

1 and on the knob t

1

t2 – set time on the switch t

2 and on the knob t

2

Un – rated voltage

Re – contact closing 15-18

t1 – set time on the switch t t

1 and on the knob t

1

t2 – set time on the switch t

2 and on the knob t

2

Minia

E20

Other devices

Impulse memory relay

��For electric circuit switching up to 16 A by impulse

command.

��However, mainly for control of lighting circuits from more

points in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc.

��It saves crossbar switches; the lighting can be controlled

by push-buttons instead of a combination of crossbar

and three-way switches.

��It saves conductors - it is possible to use smaller cross-

sections for the control circuit than for power circuit.

��It brings higher comfort of control - for example it is

possible to switch off all lights by one push-button

when leaving the house.

��The relay does not need permanent power supply;

it is supplied only for the time of control impulse

duration.

��The position of the make-and-break contact can only

be changed by applying an impulse on the following

inputs (supply voltage failures have no eff ect):

-�ON/OFF input - each impulse led on this input

changes the contact position (local control of the

impulse relay).

-�ON input - each impulse led on this input switches

the contact to position 11-14.

-�OFF input - each impulse led on this input switches

the contact to position 11-12.

Control voltage Type Product Number Weight PackageU

n code of modules [kg] [pcs]

230 MIR-16-001-A230 35675 1 0.085 1

Compensation block

��It enables control of relay by more than 15 control push-

buttons with glow discharge tube.

��Connection: parallel with MIR.


��Max. voltage: 400 V a.c.

��Capacity: 3 x 1 μF.

Accessories



OD-MIR-BK 35676 1 0.055 1

Multi-level central control block

��It enables multi-level central control of MIR.


��Description: each impulse memory relay is locally

controlled by push-buttons (local control); each

level or set of impulse memory relays is controlled

simultaneously from relevant point (central control);

all levels are jointly controlled by a single command

from a point (central multi-level control).



OD-MIR-CO 35677 1 0.05 1

IMPULSE MEMORY RELAY

Minia

E21

Other devices


Type MIR-16-001-A230


Approval marks


Arrangement of contacts 1) 2) 001


230 V a.c.

Rated current In

AC-1 16 A

AC-5a 2 A

Max. switched power 2) 4000 VA

Lamp load max. 460 W

Max. fl uorescent tube load compensated cos φ = 0.8 8x 36 W

uncompensated cos φ = 0.5 25x 36 W, 13x 65 W

Min. switched power 50 mW (10 V / 5 mA)

Rated frequency fn

50 Hz

Mechanical endurance 10 000 000 operating cycles


Switching frequency 10 operating cycles/min


Torque 0.5 Nm

Control circuit

Rated voltage Uc

230 V a.c.

Rated frequency fn

50 Hz

Min. excitation time 200 ms

Max. excitation time compensated

Min. time period between pulses 1 s

Max. number of push-buttons with glow lamp 1.1 mA 15 pcs 3)


Torque 0.5 Nm

Other data




Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts2) Diff erent contact sequence or load increase can be solved by the use of installation contactors RSI3) On ON input and OFF output there must be the same number of push-buttons with a glow discharge tube. For the number of push-buttons with a glow discharge tube higher than 15 it is necessary to use the compensation bloc OD-MIR-BK

Specifi cations

Dimensions

17.517.517.5

~88

24~4.5

44

62

45 65.5 86

8

27

4

A2A26A2A25A2A2

OD-MIR-COOD-MIR-BKMIR-16-001-A230

ON/OFF

ONOFF

141211

Minia

E22

Other devices


Connection examples

Graph Diagram

Local control

��Each relay is locally controlled by push-buttons.

ON/OFF

ON

OFF

11-14

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

ONON/OFF OFF

1412

11

A2 5

7

6

2

8

4

OD-MIR-BK OD-MIR-CO

L N

Local control of impulse relays

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

ON/OFF

ON/OFF

Minia

E23

Other devices

L N

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

OFF

ON

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

OFF

ON

5

7 4

8

2

6

OD-MIR-CO

OFF

ON

Central control of the 1st group impulse relays

Central control of the 2st group impulse relays Central control of the 2st group impulse relays

Central control of the 1st group impulse relaysCentral control of the 1st and 2st group

impulse relays

L N

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

OFF

ON

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

OFF

ON


Local control of impulse relays Local control of impulse relays


IMPULSE MEMORY RELAYLocal + central control��Each impulse relay is locally controlled by push-buttons (local control); each

level or set of impulse relays is controlled simultaneously from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central control).

Local + central + central multi-level control��Each impulse relay is locally controlled by push-buttons (local control); each level or set of impulse

relays is controlled simultaneously from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central control); all levels are jointly controlled by a single command from a point (central multi-level control).

Connection of signalling of pushed button

��When the connection of signalling of pushed button is done according to the fi gure relay can be controlled only by ON/OFF input. In such case of signalling connection when the ON or OFF

button is pushed the current is closed through the relay electronics and thus can damage it.

L N

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

ON/OFF

ON

OFF

L N

MIR-16-001-A230

A2

14

12

11

ON/OFF

Signalling of pushed button Signalling of pushed button

I

Minia

E24

Other devices

Stair switch MQA-..

��Mainly for control of lighting circuits from more points

in a corridor, on stairs, in the whole house etc.

��Possibility of 3-wire or 4-wire connection.

��Time setting (0.5 ÷�10 min) by the knob on the front

panel of the device.

��Max. 50 control push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA.



MQA-16-100-A230 37210 1 0.086 1

Stair switch MQB-..




��Time setting (0.5 ÷�10 min) by the knob on the front


��If the control push-button is pressed longer than 1 s, the

stair switch will switch on for a time four times longer

than the set time.


��Warning before expiration of the set time - 20 and 40

seconds before expiration of the set time the stair

switch warns by indicator short fl ashing of oncoming

end of timing.



MQB-16-100-A230 37211 1 0.086 1

Stair switch MQC-..




��Time setting (3 ÷� 60 min) by the knob on the front



��Warning before expiration of the set time - 20 and 40

seconds before expiration of the set time the stair

switch warns by indicator short fl ashing of oncoming

end of timing.

��The timing is terminated by pressing the push-button

again before 40 seconds to the end of the set time.The

timing cycle is restarted by pressing the push-button

again 40 or less seconds to the end of the set time.



MQC-16-100-A230 37830 1 0.086 1

STAIR SWITCHES

Minia

E25

Other devices

STAIR SWITCHES

Type MQA-16-100-A230 MQB-16-100-A230 MQC-16-100-A230

Standards EN 60 669 EN 60 669 EN 61 812-1

Approval marks


Arrangement of contacts 1) 10 10 10


250 V a.c. 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c.

Rated current In

AC-1 16 A 16 A 16 A

Inductive load cosφ 0.6 10 A 10 A 10 A

Lamp load max. 2000 W 2000 W 2000 W

Max. fl uorescent tube load uncompensated 20 pcs 58 W 20 pcs 58 W 20 pcs 58 W

compensated in series 40 pcs 58 W 40 pcs 58 W 40 pcs 58 W

duo connection 2x 20 pcs 58 W 2x 20 pcs 58 W 2x 20 pcs 58 W

EVG = electronic ballast 5 pcs 20 W 5 pcs 20 W 5 pcs 20 W

Siemens ECG 10 pcs 58 W 10 pcs 58 W 10 pcs 58 W

Min. switched power 10 V / 300 mA 10 V / 300 mA 10 V / 300 mA

Rated frequency fn

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz

Connection 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2

Torque 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm 1.2 Nm

Control circuit

Rated control voltage Uc

230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Range of control voltage 90 ÷ 110 % Uc

90 ÷ 110 % Uc

90 ÷ 110 % Uc

Rated frequency fn

50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz

Power loss at standstill 0.7 W 1 W 1 W

at timing process 3.5 W 1.7 W 1.7 W

Time setting 0.5 ÷ 10 min 0.5 ÷ 10 min 3 ÷ 60 min

Min. excitation time 30 ms 30 ms 30 ms

Max. excitation time 2) compensated compensated compensated

Max. number of push-buttons with glow lamp 1 mA 50 pcs 50 pcs 50 pcs

Reset by next impulse yes yes yes

Additional extension of the set time no yes 3) no

Warning before end of timing no yes 4) yes 4)

Connection 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2 1.5 ÷ 6 mm2


Other data

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35


Ambient temperature -10 ÷ + 50 °C -10 ÷ + 50 °C -10 ÷ + 50 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts.2) The device is able to withstand permanent load either in switching the manual change-over switch on the front panel of the device or in control push-button locking.3) If the control push-button is closed for more than 1 s, the set time is extended four times.4) 20 and 40 seconds before expiration of the set time the stair switch warns by indicator short fl ashing of oncoming end of timing.

Specifi cations

Minia

E26

Other devices

STAIR SWITCHES

4-wire connection

230 V a.c.

3-wire connection

230 V a.c.

Dimensions Diagram

18 24

44

64 1.5

45 67 907

2L

1N

MQA-16-100-A230, MQB-16-100-A230, MQC-16-100-A230

L N

1 2

MQA-16-100-A230MQB-16-100-A230MQC-16-100-A230

Connection examples

Stair switch is controlled by switching of the phase conductor.

This connection is used mainly in new installations.

Stair switch is controlled by switching of the N-conductor.

This connection is used only in old installations.

Graph

t<te

L-2

Un

te te t<te

t<1s t>1st<1s t<1s

4x t

40 s

20 s

L-2

Un

tet >t>tee -40 ste40 s

20 s

L-2

40 s

20 s t -40 s>te

Un

te

te

MQA-16-100-A230 MQB-16-100-A230

MQC-16-100-A230

Minia

E27

Other devices

Mechanical program timer

��For real time load switching up to 16 A / 250 V.

��Daily program.

��Switching time setting: by plastic plates along the

perimeter of the dial.

��Shortest switching interval: 30 min.

��Change-over switch automatic run / permanent opera-

tion / permanent off .

��Run reserve: 100 hours.

Specifi cations

Design Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package


standard 001 MAP-16-001-A230 36879 3 0.175 1mini 100 MAP-16-100-A230-MINI 36880 1 0.1 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Digital program timer

��For switching of of load of max. 16 A / 250 V a.c. in real time.

��Weekly and daily program.

��Switching time setting: by push-buttons on the front


��Shortest switching interval: 1 min.

��Change-over switch automatic run / permanent opera-

tion / permanent off .

��Run reserve: 6 years from the manufacture date.

Number Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package

of channels of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

1 001 MAR-16-001-A230 36881 2 0.24 12 002 MAR-16-002-A230 36882 2 0.24 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Type MAP-16-001-A230 MAP-16-100-A230-MINI MAR-16-001-A230 MAR-16-002-A230

Approval marks


Arrangement of contacts 001 100 001 002

Rated operating voltage Ue 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c. 250 V a.c.

Rated current Ie AC-1 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A

Switched power AC-1 3 600 W 3 600 W 3 600 W 3 600 W

AC-3 1 000 W 1 000 W 1 800 W 1 800 W

AC-5a uncompensated 1 400 VA 1 400 VA 1 400 VA 1 400 VA

AC-5a compensated 7 μF 58 W 58 W 60 W 60 W

AC-5b 1 000 W 1 000 W 1 800 W 1 800 W

Min. switched power 4 V / 1 mA 4 V / 1 mA 12 V / 100 mA 12 V / 100 mA

Rated frequency fn 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz

Mechanical endurance 20 000 000 operating cycles 20 000 000 operating cycles 10 000 000 operating cycles 10 000 000 operating cycles

Electrical endurance 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles 100 000 operating cycles

Connection 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2


Time circuit

Min. switching interval 30 min 15 min 1 min 1 min

Min. time unit 15 min 15 min 1 min 1 min

Program daily daily weekly weekly

Number of memory places - - 56 28 on each channel

Pre-set blocks in the week - - Mo-Su, Mo-Fr, Sa-Su, individual Mo-Su, Mo-Fr, Sa-Su, individual

Run accuracy ± 2.5 s / day ± 2.5 s / day ± 0.86 s / day ± 0.86 s / day

Switching accuracy ± 5 min ± 5 min - -

Run reserve 100 hours 100 hours 6 years 6 years

Battery type NiMH NiMH Lithium Lithium

Charging time min 48 hours min 48 hours - -

Supply circuit

Rated control voltage Uc 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Operating range 85 ÷ 110 % Uc

85 ÷ 110 % Uc

85 ÷ 110 % Uc

85 ÷ 110 % Uc

Rated frequency fn 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz 50 / 60 Hz

Rated power loss Pv 1 VA 1VA 2 VA 2 VA

Connection 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2 1.5 ÷ 4 mm2


Other data

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - type TH 35 TH 35 TH 35 TH 35


Ambient temperature -10 ÷ + 55 °C -10 ÷ + 55 °C -10 ÷ + 55 °C -10 ÷ + 55 °C


TIMERS

Minia

E28

Other devices

TIMERSDimensions

36

83

89

45

44

64

6

45 83

64

446

89

64

6 44

834588

44

64

6

45 83

89

53 17.8

MAP-16-001-A230

MAR-16-001-A230 MAR-16-002-A230

MAP-16-100-A230-MINI

U1U2142

4

36

856N

4

L21

12

NL

41

NL

Diagram

MAP-16-001-A230 MAP-16-100-A230-MINI MAR-16-001-A230 MAR-16-002-A230

1 1 1 1 5

U1 L

U2 N N N

82 4 L L L4 4 4 62 2

Minia

E29

Other devices

Tumbler power switches APN-..


up to 63 A, 230/400 V a.c.

��For electric circuit switching.

��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches, undervol-

tage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting busbars etc.

��Possible interconnection by means of busbars.

Rated operating Number Type Product Number Weight Packagecurrent Ie of poles code of modules [kg] [pcs]

32 A

1 APN-32-1 34338 1 0.12 121+N APN-32-1N 34339 2 0.235 6

2 APN-32-2 34340 2 0.235 63 APN-32-3 34341 3 0.355 4

3+N APN-32-3N 34342 4 0.47 3

63 A

1 APN-63-1 34343 1 0.12 121+N APN-63-1N 34344 2 0.235 6

2 APN-63-2 34345 2 0.235 63 APN-63-3 34346 3 0.355 4

3+N APN-63-3N 34347 4 0.47 3

Tumbler power switches AST-..


up to 125 A, 230/400 V a.c., 48 V d.c.

��For electric circuit switching.

��Wide range of accessories – auxiliary switches,

undervoltage releases and shunt trips, interconnecting

busbars etc.

��Possible interconnection by means of busbars.

Rated current Number Type Product Number Weight PackageI

nof poles code of modules [kg] [pcs]

125 A1 AST-125-1 37284 1.5 0.21 33 AST-125-3 37285 4.5 0.63 1

3+N AST-125-3N 37286 6 0.84 1

Accessories

Auxiliary switches PS-LS-.. page B19

Shunt trips SV-LS-.. page B22

Undervoltage releases SP-LS-.. page B25

Interconnecting busbars S1L-27-.., S3L-27-.., S4L-27-.. page E49

Terminal extensions AS-50-S-AL01, CS-FH000-.., N3x10-FH000 page E54






Interpole barriers OD-LP-MP01 page B30

Interconnecting busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.., S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.. page E49


TUMBLER POWER SWITCHES

Minia

E30

Other devices


Specifi cations

Type APN-.. AST-..


Approval marks

Number of poles 1, 1+N, 2, 3, 3+N 1, 3, 3+N


32 A, 63 A 125 A


230/400 V a.c. 230/400 V a.c., 48 V d.c.


253/440 V a.c. 253/440 V a.c., 52 V d.c.


12 V a.c./d.c. 12 V a.c./d.c.

Rated frequency fn

40 ÷ 60 Hz 40 ÷ 60 Hz

Rated conditional short-circuit current with backup fuse max 1:1 gG 10 kA 10 kA




6 kV 6 kV


Utilization category AC-22A AC-22A, DC-22A



Connection

Conductor Cu – rigid (solid stranded) 0.5 ÷ 25 mm2, 2x(0.5÷10) mm2 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2

Conductor Cu – flexible 0.5 ÷ 16 mm2 1.5 ÷ 50 mm2, 2x16 mm2

Torque 2 Nm 3.5 Nm



Ambient temperature -20 ÷ + 55 °C -20 ÷ + 55 °C


Dimensions

7017.5 35 52.5

~73

64

72

86~90

~4.5 44

~4.5

45

APN-..-1 APN-..-1NAPN-..-2

APN-..-3 APN-..-3N

26.6

AST-..-1

79.8 106.4

74

70

71.5

9045

60

445.5

1.7

AST-..-3 AST-..-3N

Minia

E31

Other devices


Diagram

APN-..-2 APN-..-3, AST-..-3 APN-..-3N, AST-..-3N

31

42

1 53

2 64

3 5 N11

2 4 6 N2

APN-..-1, AST-..-1 APN-..-1N

1

2

N11

N22

Minia

E32

Other devices

Specifi cations

Switch-disconnector AVN-DC-63-4Rated operating Type Product Number Weight Package

current code of modules [kg] [pcs]

63 A AVN-DC-63-4 39752 4 0.672 1


of contacts code of modules [kg] [pcs]

11 1) PS-LV-1100-K 38938 0.5 0.05 1


Type AVN-DC-63-4

Standards EN 60947-3, IEC/EN 60669-1Approval marks

Number of poles 4

Rated operating current Ie 63 A

Rated operating voltage in connection 4 poles in series Ue 1000 V d.c.

Min. voltage / current 24 V / 300 mA

Rated short-time withstand current DC-1000 V 4 pole Icw 760 A

Rated short-circuit making capacity DC-1000 V 4 pole Icm 500 A



Rated power losses per pole 4.4 W

Rated impulse withstand voltage (1.2/50 μs) Uimp > 5 kV

Utilization category DC-21B



Connection

Conductor Cu – rigid (solid, stranded) 0.75 ÷ 35 mm2

Conductor Cu – flexible ( with a sleeve) 0.75 ÷ 25 mm2

Torque 2.5 ÷ 3 Nm

Top or bottom connection yes 1)



Working position Arbitrary1) It is necessary to observe the polarity marked on the device

��Switch-disconnector, in particular for photovoltaic applica-

tions with high rated operating voltage up to 1000 V d.c.

��New terminal system.

��Easy connection and check of conductors.

��Possibility of connection up to 4 conductors in the terminal.

��Possibility of connection conductors of various cross

sections.

��Easy installation by means of the new clip system on or

from DIN rail.


Auxiliary switch PS-LV-1100

��Accessories to AVN-DC-63-4.

��Installation: on the right side of the switch-disconnector.

��For signalling the position of contacts of the switch-

disconnector.

��Rated operating voltage / current: AC-14 230 V / 6 A,

DC-13 220 V / 1 A.

��Connection of conductors: 0.75 ÷ 2.5 mm2.

Minia

E33

Other devices


Diagram

Dimensions

64

70

35

6 44

45

AVN-DC-63-4.

90

72

909 6

45 90

73.3

44

64

68.5

PS-LV-1100

AVN-DC-63-4

3

42

1

8

7

6

5

+

-+

-+

-+

-

13 21

14 22

PS-LV-1100

Connection

Load

Both grounded and ungrounded systems

1000 V d.c.

Only ungrounded system

1000 V d.c.

Minia

E34

Other devices


Terminal systemDesign: two levels of terminals with a fi xed barrier between them.

Connection: each level enables connection of both the

conductor and interconnecting busbar (interconnecting busbars

with pins, type „S“ are shown on page E52). This is possible from

both sides of the device. For connection range see the table below.

Safety: the terminals are equipped with sliding plastic caps,

which eff ectively increase protection against dangerous

contact with live parts.

AdvantagesPossibility of connection:

� conductors of various cross sections

� up to 4 conductors in the terminal

� conductor of cross section up to 35 mm2

Mounting/demounting on/from „DIN“ rails

New system of latches enables:

� very quick mounting and demounting by hand, without

any tool needed.

� withdrawal/replacement of the switch-disconnector

from a row of devices interconnected by the

interconnecting busbar up or down without interruption

of adjacent circuit or removal of the busbar.

Connection range

Rigid conductor (solid, stranded) Conductor flexible with a sleeve

Number of connected conductors Level 1 Level 2 Level 1 Level 2

1× conductor1× ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2)

1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)

2× conductor

2× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2)

2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2)

1× ( ≤ 35 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 6 mm2)

1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)

1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)

3× conductor

1× ( ≤ 35 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 2,5 mm2)

1× ( ≤ 16 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2)

2× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 25 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 1× ( ≤ 16 mm2)

4× conductor 2× ( ≤ 10 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 6 mm2) 2× ( ≤ 4 mm2)

Interconnecting busbars S1L-...

Interconnecting busbars S1L-...

Barrier Level 2

Level 1


Minia

E35

Other devices

Tumbler switches

��For switching of up to 4 electric circuits up to 25 A.

��They can be used in both building and industrial

installations and in security technology.

��Modular design with fastening on the „U“ rail wide

35 mm according to EN 60715.



11 MSP-11 35865 1 0.084 122 MSP-22 35870 1 0.094 140 MSP-40 35874 1 0.094 1


Tumbler switches with signalling

��For electric circuit switching up to 25 A.





��Installed indicator light of white colour 230 V a.c. can be

replaced by other one.

��Indicator light is connected between the contact and

the terminal (see the diagram).

Colour Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package

of indicator light of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

white 11 MSP-11-SG-A230 37262 1 0.0940 120 MSP-20-SG-A230 37263 1 0.0940 1


Colour Rated Type Product Weight Packageof cover voltage code [kg] [pcs]

red 230 V a.c. SC-A230 11102 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SC-X024 11106 0.003 12

green 230 V a.c. SE-A230 11103 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SE-X024 11107 0.003 12

yellow 230 V a.c. SD-A230 11104 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SD-X024 11108 0.003 12

white 230 V a.c. SG-A230 11101 0.003 1224 V a.c./d.c. SG-X024 11105 0.003 12

Indicator lights

��Accessories for tumbler switches with signalling as sub-

stitute for the installed white indicator light.

��Indicator light power: 0.8 W

��Indicator light contains a LED.

��Indicator lights light permanently.

Accessories

TUMBLER SWITCHES

Minia

E36

Other devices

TUMBLER SWITCHES

Type MSP-.. MSP-..-SG-A230

Standards EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1

Approval marks

Contacts

Arrangement of contacts 1) 11, 22, 40 11, 20


230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c.


25 A 25 A


AC-12 25 A 25 A

AC-15 6 A 6 A

DC-12 1 A 1 A


Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2


Light signalling

Power output - 0.8 W


- 24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c.

Colour of cover - white, red, green, yellow 2)

Light - permanent

Source - LED

Dispersion - by raster in front of LED

Connection - 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2

Torque - 0.8 Nm

Other data



Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C -25 ÷ +55 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts.2) Tumbler switch with signalling contains a white indicator light; other colour can be bought as accessories.

Specifi cations

Dimensions

17.5 24

44

60 10

5.5

45 65.5 8689

75

1

2

6

4

8

3

MSP-..

Diagram

MSP-11 MSP-11-SG-A230 MSP-20-SG-A230

3

4

1

2

1 5

(+)2 64

5

4 6

1

(+)2

MSP-22

5 73

6 84

1

2

MSP-40

2 4 6 8

1 3 5 7

Minia

E37

Other devices

TUMBLER SWITCHES

Replacement of indicator light

demounting tool

1

2

3demounting hole

��Installed indicator lights of white colour can be replaced by other ones (see accessories).

Indicator light demounting:

1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole and push to ensure that

the indicator light jumps up a little.

2) Remove the indicator light from the tumbler switch.

Installation of indicator light:

3) Insert and press the indicator light in the hole in the tumbler switch.

Connection examples

5

5

4

4

6

6

1

1

L1

L1

N

N

L2

L2

2

2

MSP

-20-

SG-A

230

MSP

-20-

SG-A

230

load

load

load

load

��The indicator light can be connected in two ways:

– to indicate load connection

– to indicate voltage presence and to enable easy fi nding of the switch

during the night-time

Indicator light indicates load connection Indicator light indicates presence of voltage

Minia

E38

Other devices

Rocker-type switches and change-over switches


��Use in both building and industrial installations and

security technology.

��Switches with backlighting (glow lamp).

��Change-over switches with interposition.

��Change-over switches with interposition without

arresting.



Specifi cations

Type MSK-10

MSK-10-..

MSK-001-1X2 MSK-001-102

MSK-001-1T2

Standards EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1

EN 60669-1 EN 60669-1 EN 60669-1

EN 60073 EN 60073 EN 60073

EN 61058-1 EN 61058-1 EN 61058-1

Approval marks

Contacts

Arrangement of contacts 1) 10 001 001


250 V a.c., 12 V d.c. 250 V a.c., 12 V d.c. 250 V a.c., 12 V d.c.

Min. switched power 300 mW 300 mW 300 mW

Min. voltage Umin

12 V 12 V 12 V


16 A 10 A 6 A


AC-1 16 A 10 A 6 A

AC-15 10 A 6 A 4 A

AC-5a - cosφ=0,5 6 A 4 A 3 A

AC-5a - cosφ=0,9 2 A 1.1 A 0.7 A

AC-5b 4.4 A 2.6 A 1.7 A

DC-1 10 A 10 A 10 A

Electrical endurance 50 000 operating cycles 50 000 operating cycles 50 000 operating cycles

Mechanical endurance 100 000 op. cycles 100 000 op. cycles 50 000 operating cycles

Connection 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2


Other data



Ambient temperature -20 ÷ +55 °C -20 ÷ +55 °C -20 ÷ +55 °C

Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make, break and break-make contacts

Design Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package


Switch 10 MSK-10 35678 1 0.065 1Switch with red backlight 10 MSK-10-SC 35679 1 0.065 1Switch with green backlight 10 MSK-10-SE 35680 1 0.065 1Change-over switch 001 MSK-001-1X2 35682 1 0.065 1Change-over switch with intermediate position 001 MSK-001-102 35681 1 0.065 1

Change-over switch with interme-diate position without arrestment 001 MSK-001-1T2 35683 1 0.065 1


ROCKER-TYPE SWITCHES AND CHANGE-OVER SWITCHES

Minia

E39

Other devices

ROCKER-TYPE SWITCHES AND CHANGE-OVER SWITCHES

Dimensions

244.5

44

62 6.5

45 65.5 8688

17.5

MSK-..

4

111

2

Diagram

MSK-10 MSK-10-.. MSK-001-1X2 MSK-001-102 MSK-001-1T2

21 1

4

2 1

I2

II4 1 1

2 2

II I a

o o4 4

I I

Minia

E40

Other devices

Type MST-22

Standards EN 60947-5-1

Approval marks

Contacts



230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c.


25 A


AC-12 25 A

AC-15 6 A

DC-12 1 A


Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2

Torque 0.8 Nm

Push-buttons

Colour black, red, green, white 2)

Other data



Ambient temperature -25 ÷ +55 °C

Working position Arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) Push-button switch contains red and green push-button; the other colours can be bought as accessories

Push-button switches




��The circuit is switched on permanently by upper green

push-button, and switched off by lower red push-button.

��Already installed push-button can be replaced.



Specifi cations



22 MST-22 35555 1 0.12 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

Colour Type Product Weight Package

code [kg] [pcs]

red TC 8930 0.002 12green TE 8931 0.002 12black TB 8932 0.002 12white TG 8934 0.002 12

Accessories

Push-buttons

��They are intended for replacement of the already

installed push-buttons.

PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES

Minia

E41

Other devices

PUSH-BUTTON SWITCHES

Dimensions

17.5 24

44

62 7

5.5

89 45 65.5 86

75

1

2

6

4

8

3

MST-22

Diagram

MST-22

7531

8642blockingmechanism

Replacement of push-button

demounting tool

11

22demounting hole 33

��Installed push-button can be replaced by other one (see accessories).

Push-button demounting:

1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the push-

button jumps up a little.

2) Remove push-button from push-button switch.

Installation of a push-button:

3) Insert and press the push-button in the hole in the push-button switch.

For push-button, under which there is a spring, it is fi rst necessary to cut the

lug, and only after it insert it in the hole in the push-button switch and press it.

Minia

E42

Other devices

Control push-buttons



��For switching of electric circuits up to 25 A.

��Already installed push-button can be replaced.



Colour Arrangement Type Product Number Weight Package

of push-button of contacts 1) code of modules [kg] [pcs]

black 01 MTX-01-TB 37265 1 0.072 110 MTX-10-TB 37268 1 0.072 122 MTX-22-TB 37271 1 0.097 1

red 01 MTX-01-TC 37266 1 0.072 110 MTX-10-TC 37269 1 0.072 122 MTX-22-TC 37272 1 0.097 1

green 01 MTX-01-TE 37267 1 0.072 110 MTX-10-TE 37270 1 0.072 122 MTX-22-TE 37273 1 0.097 1


Control push-buttons with signalling



��For switching of electric circuits up to 25 A.

��The installed push-button of black colour and indicator

lights of white colour 230 V a.c. can be replaced.





11 MTX-11-TB-SG-A230 37274 1 0.107 120 MTX-20-TB-SG-A230 37275 1 0.107 1


Double control push-buttons



��For switching two independent electric circuits up to 25 A.

��The installed push-button black colour can be replaced.





2x 11 MT2-11-TB 37264 1 0.0970 11) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts

CONTROL PUSH-BUTTONS

Minia

E43

Other devices

Colour Type Product Weight Package

code [kg] [pcs]

red TC 8930 0.002 12green TE 8931 0.002 12black TB 8932 0.002 12white TG 8934 0.002 12

Accessories

Push-buttons

��They are intended for replacement of the already

installed push-buttons.

Indicator lights

��Indicator light power: 0.8 W



Colour Rated Type Product Weight Package

of cover voltage code [kg] [pcs]





Specifi cations

Type MTX-.. MTX-..-TB-SG-230 MT2-11-TB

Standards EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1 EN 60947-5-1

Approval marks

Contacts

Arrangement of contacts 1) 01, 10, 22 11, 20 2x 11


230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c. 230/400 V a.c., 220 V d.c.


25 A 25 A 25 A


AC-12 25 A 25 A 25 A

AC-15 6 A 6 A 6 A

DC-12 1 A 1 A 1 A

Mechanical endurance 30 000 operating cycles 30 000 operating cycles 30 000 operating cycles

Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2


Push-buttons

Colour black, red, green, white 2) black, red, green, white 2) black, red, green, white 2)

Light signalling

Power output - 0.8 W -


- 24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c. -

Colour of cover - white, red, green, yellow 2) -

Light - permanent -

Source - LED -

Dispersion - by raster in front of LED -

Connection - 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2 -

Torque - 0.8 Nm -

Other data




Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) Each digit indicates successively the number of make and break contacts2) For control push-buttons it is possible to replace push-button and indicator lights additionally (see accessories)


Minia

E44

Other devices


Dimensions

17.5 17.524 24

44 44

62 627 7

5.5 5.5

89 8945 4565.5

65.586 86

7 75 5

1 1

2 2

6 6

4 4

8 8

3 3

MTX-.. MT2-..

Diagram

MTX-10-..

1

2

1

2(+)4 6

5

MTX-11-TB-SG-A230

1

2(+)4 6

5

MTX-20-TB-SG-A230 MT2-11-TB

1

2 6 4 8

5 3 71

2

MTX-01-..

2

1

4 6 8

3 5 7

MTX-22-..

Replacement of push-button and indicator light at MTX-..

demounting tool

11

22demounting hole

33

��Installed push-button or indicator light can be replaced by other one (see accessories).

Push-button or indicator light demounting:

1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the

push-button or indicator light jumps up a little.

2) Remove push-button or the indicator light from control push-button.

Installation of a push-button or indicator light:

3) Insert and press the push-button or the indicator light in the hole in the control push-button.

Push-button demounting:

1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole to ensure that the

push-button jumps up a little.

2 )Remove push-button from control push-button.

Installation of a push-button:

3) Insert and press the push-button in the hole in the control push-button.

demounting tool

11

22demounting hole

33

Replacement of push-buttons at MT2-..

��Installed push-button can be replaced by other one (see accessories).

Minia

E45

Other devices

Signal lights

��For signalling operating states, emergency lighting etc.





��Empty modules of signal lights enable arbitrary design.

Number of Colour of Rated Type Product Number Weight Package

indicator lights indicator light voltage code of modules [kg] [pcs]

1

red230 V a.c. MKA-SC-A230 37276 1 0.08 124 V a.c./d.c. MKA-SC-X024 37277 1 0.08 1

green230 V a.c. MKA-SE-A230 37278 1 0.08 124 V a.c./d.c. MKA-SE-X024 37279 1 0.08 1

white 230 V a.c. MKA-SG-A230 37280 1 0.08 12 red + green 230 V a.c. MKA-SC-SE-A230 37281 1 0.09 1

Colour Rated Type Product Weight Package

voltage code [kg] [pcs]





AccessoriesIndicator lights

��Indicator light power: 0.8 W.



Specifi cations

Type MKA-..

Standards EN 60947-5-1

Approval marks

Light signalling

Power output 0.8 W


24 V a.c./d.c., 230 V a.c.

Colour of indicator light red, green, yellow, white

Light permanent

Source LED

Dispersion by raster in front of LED

Connection 0.75 ÷ 6 mm2, 2x(0.75 ÷ 2.5) mm2

Torque 0.8 Nm

Other data




Working position arbitrary

SIGNAL LIGHTS

Empty modules of signal lights

Number of holes Type Product Number Weight Package

for indicator lights code of modules [kg] [pcs]

1 MKA-1 35558 1 0.07 1

2 MKA-2 35559 1 0.07 1

Minia

E46

Other devices

SIGNAL LIGHTS

Diagram

2 2(+) (+)4 4

MKA-SC-..MKA-SE-..MKA-SG-..

MKA-SC-SE-A230

3

(+)

1

Replacement of indicator lights

demounting tool

11

22

demounting hole 33

��Installed indicator lights can be replaced by other ones (see accessories).

Indicator light demounting:

1) Insert demounting tool (e.g. paper-clip) in the demounting hole and push to ensure that

the indicator light jumps up a little.

2) Remove the indicator light from the signal light.

Installation of indicator light:

3) Insert and press the indicator light in the hole in the signal light.

Dimensions

17.5 24

44

62

5.5

89 45 65.5 86

1

2 4

3

MKA-..

connectors for indicator lights input

MKA-1 MKA-2

3(+)

(+)(+)

1

2 4 2 4

Minia

E47

Other devices

��For acoustic signalling of device status and the like.

��Mechanical design.

��Without sparking.

��Minimum service life 300 h.

��They are not intended for continuous operation

(continuous duty max. 1 hour).

��There are intended for installation in switchboards.

Rated operating Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U

ecode of modules [kg] [pcs]

8 ÷ 12 V a.c. UMZ-A012 35691 1 0.075 1230 V a.c. UMZ-A230 35692 1 0.075 1

Electric bells

Rated operating Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U

ecode of modules [kg] [pcs]

8 ÷ 12 V a.c. UMB-A012 35689 1 0.075 1230 V a.c. UMB-A230 35690 1 0.075 1

Electric buzzers

� Single-tone design.

Specifi cations

Type UMZ-.., UMB-..

Approval marks

Power supply


8 ÷ 12 V a.c., 230 V a.c.

Input power 4.6 VA

Rated frequency fn

40 ÷ 60 Hz

Connection

Cross-section 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2

Torque 0.5 Nm

Conductor L and N arbitrarily to terminals

Other data

Loudness from a distance 0.5 m 90 dB (UMZ-..), 80 dB (UMB-..)




Working position arbitrary

Dimensions

88 8665.545

62

44

2417.5 4.5

UMZ-.., UMB-..

Diagram

UMZ UMB

ELECTRIC BELLS AND BUZZERS

Minia

E48

Other devices

Safety bell transformer

��For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the po-

wer input up to 4 VA with safe low voltage 6, 8, 12 V a.c.

��For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones,

auxiliary circuits of contactors, lighting, relays etc.

��The transformer is unconditionally short-circuit-proof

– withstands continuous short-circuit even without a

backup protection device, and continues to perform all its

functions as soon as the overload or short-circuit ceases.

��Degree of protection IP30.

Safety power supply

��For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the power

input up to 10 VA with safe low voltage 12, 24 V a.c./d.c.

��For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones, door

openers, transducers, auxiliary circuits of contactors,

lighting, relays etc.

��On the secondary side it is equipped with a PTC

thermistor (PTC), which limits the overcurrent in the

secondary winding at overload.

��Current limitation is signalled by two-colour LED, which

goes red.

��Presence of UPRI

is signalled by two-colour LED going

green.

��Protection of outputs by blocking capacitors against

interference.

��Equipped with voltage stabilizers.

Rated primary Rated secondary Type Product Number Weight Packagevoltage U

PRIvoltage U

SECcode of modules [kg] [pcs]

230 V a.c. 6, 8, 12 V a.c. UTZ-4-A 35688 3 0.475 1


PRIvoltage U


230 V a.c.12 V a.c. / d.c. UNZ-10T-X012 35685 3 0.36 124 V a.c. / d.c. UNZ-10T-X024 35686 3 0.36 1


PRIvoltage U


230 V a.c. 24 V a.c., 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c. UNZR-10T-X024 35687 3 0.36 1

Controlled safety power supply

��For safe isolation and power supply of circuits of the

power input up to 10 VA with safe low voltage 24 V a.c.

and regulated voltage 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c.

��For power supply of door bells, gongs, telephones, door

openers, transducers, auxiliary circuits of contactors,

lighting, relays etc.

��On the secondary side it is equipped with a PTC

thermistor (PTC), which limits the overcurrent in the

secondary winding at overload.

��Current limitation is signalled by two-colour LED, which

goes red.

��Presence of UPRI

is signalled by two-colour LED going

green.

��Protection of outputs by blocking capacitors against

interference.

��Equipped with voltage stabilizers.

POWER SUPPLIES

Minia

E49

Other devices

POWER SUPPLIES

Specifi cations

Type UTZ-4-A UNZ-10T-.. UNZR-10T-X024

Standards EN 60742 EN 60742 EN 60742

Approval marks

Power output 4 VA 10 VA 1) 10 VA 1)

Rated primary voltage UPRI

230 V a.c. 230 V a.c. 230 V a.c.

Rated secondary voltage AC 2) / current USEC

/ ISEC

6 V a.c. / 0.33 A 12 V a.c. / 0.8 A 24 V a.c. / 0.36 A

8 V a.c. / 0.33 A 24 V a.c. / 0.36 A

12 V a.c. / 0.33 A

Rated secondary voltage DC 2) / current USEC

/ ISEC

- 12 V d.c. / 0.4 A 1.2 ÷ 24 V d.c. / 0.08 ÷ 0.3 A

24 V d.c. / 0.2 A

Rated frequency fn

50 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz

Protection class II II II

Light indication presence UPRI

- green LED green LED

Light indication current limitation - red LED red LED

Connection

Cross-section 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2 0.2 ÷ 2.5 mm2


Other data

Mounting on “U” rail according to EN 60715 - typ TH 35 TH 35 TH 35



Working position arbitrary arbitrary arbitrary1) At simultaneous loading of both AC and DC outputs the sum of both power inputs must not exceed 8 VA2) The transformers have a higher voltage at off -load connection. The shown voltages are those at rated load.

Dimensions

Diagram

UTZ-4-A UNZ-10T-.. UNZR-10T-X024

3

1 2230V

8V4

6V

12V6

UDC

SEC

UPRI

3

-

1 2

USEC

AC+

4 5 6 6

2

54

+

-

UDC

REG

3 1

UAC

SEC

UPRI

5

24

44

62 3

45 65.5 86

5.3

88

52.5 52.5 52.5

UTZ-4-A UNZ-10T-.. UNZR-10T-X024

Minia

E50

Other devices

POWER SUPPLIES

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600

UNZ-10T-X012 - 12 V a.c.

I [mA]sec

UNZ-10T-X024 - 24 V a.c.

UNZR-10T-X024 - 24 V a.c.

At ambient temperature +23 °C Load characteristic UNZ-10T-.., UNZR-10T-X024 - AC outlet

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400

I [mA]sec

U

[V]

sec

U

[

V]se

c

U

[V]

sec

Load characteristic UTZ-4-A

U = 8 V sec

U = 6 V sec

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

26

0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800

I [mA]sec

At ambient temperature +23 °CLoad characteristic UNZ-10T-.., UNZR-10T-X024 - DC outlet

UNZR-10T-X024 - 1,2-24 V d.c.

UNZ-10T-X024 - 24 V d.c.

UNZ-10T-X012 - 12 V d.c.

U = 12 Vsec

Characteristics

�� Imax

��Notice: at simultaneous loading of both AC and DC outputs the sum of both power inputs must not exceed 8 VA!

��At overload the red indicator light LIM on the front panel of the device goes on. Output current will drop to approx. 100 mA.

��It is necessary to disconnect the load at the output to renew the function.

Minia

E51

Other devices



��ZSE-.. according to IEC 60884-1 – a connector of type E;

ensures contact by means of the connector with two

round plug contacts and central earthing pin. This

type is sometimes referred to as French one.

��ZSF-.. according to DIN 49440 - a connector of type F

(Schuko), sometimes referred to as German one. It

diff ers in the design of the earthing contact, which

consists of two contact metal strips placed on the

connector perimeter.

Dimensions Diagram

44

9045

4.5

60

41

ZSE-..

44

62.5

90

4.5 41

45

ZSF-..

ZSE-.., ZSF-..

Socket outlets

Type Use Connection Product Number Weight Package


ZSE-03 IEC 60884-1 bottom 37290 2.5 0.15 1

ZSE-06 IEC 60884-1 bottom and top 37291 2.5 0.15 1

ZSF-03 DIN (“SCHUKO”) bottom 37292 2.5 0.15 1

ZSF-06 DIN (“SCHUKO”) bottom and top 37293 2.5 0.15 1

Type ZSE-.., ZSF-..

Standards IEC 60884-1, DIN 49440

Approval marks

Rated operating voltage/current Ue/I

n230 V a.c./16 A




Connection 1 ÷ 16 mm2, 2x (1 ÷ 4) mm2

Specifi cations

SOCKET OUTLETS

Minia

E52

Other devices

Interconnecting busbars

��For interconnection of 1 to 4-pole circuit breakers,

tumbler switches, residual current circuit breakers,

lightning current arresters and surge voltage arresters.

��For interconnection of a series of single-phase or three-

phase circuit breakers and tumbler switches, on

which an auxiliary switch is mounted.

��Busbars G1L-.., G2L-.., G3L-.., G4L-.. with forks into the

head part of the terminal.

��Busbars S1L-.., S2L-.., S3L-.., S4L-.. with pins into the

clamp part of the terminal.

��After shortening of busbars to particular length it is

necessary to remove the burrs of copper in order to

prevent short-circuit etc. Where possible use end covers

EKC to cover the ends of interconnecting busbars.

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS

Busbar Number Spacing of Number Cross-section Type Product End Weight Package

shape of poles outlets [mm] of outlets [mm2] code cap [kg] [pcs]

fork

1 17.8

210 G1L-30-10 37352 - 1) 0.008 5016 G1L-30-16 37356 - 1) 0.012 50

3 16 G1L-50-16-L 39789 EKC-1 0.019 50

4 16 G1L-65-16-L 39790 EKC-1 0.024 50

610 G1L-106-10 37353 - 1) 0.023 5016 G1L-106-16 37357 - 1) 0.037 50

1210 G1L-210-10 37354 - 1) 0.045 5016 G1L-210-16 37358 - 1) 0.073 50

57

12 G1L-1000-12 37355 EKC-1 0.227 50

16 G1L-1000-16-L 39788 EKC-1 0.312 50

20 G1L-1000-20 37359 - 0.367 50

27 2) 37 24 G1L-27-1000-24 37360 - 0.307 50

2 17.8 28 x 216 G2L-1000-16 37361 EKC-2+3 0.477 2016 G2L-1000-16-DC 39080 EKC-2+3 0.467 20

317.8

2 x 310 G3L-106-10 37362 - 1) 0.046 2516 G3L-106-16 37366 - 1) 0.074 25

3 x 310 G3L-160-10 37363 - 1) 0.069 2516 G3L-160-16 37367 - 1) 0.111 25

4 x 310 G3L-210-10 37364 - 1) 0.091 2516 G3L-210-16 37368 - 1) 0.147 25

19 x 310 G3L-1000-10C 37365 EKC-3 0.457 2016 G3L-1000-16C 37369 EKC-2+3 0.737 20

2 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 16 x 3 16 G3L+9-1000-16 37370 EKC-2+3 0.614 20

3+N 17.8 27 x 2 16 G3L+N-1000-16 37372 EKC-4 0.983 15

4 17.8 14 x 4 16 G4L-1000-16 37371 EKC-4 0.983 15

pin

1

17.8

1210 S1L-210-10 38475 - 1) 0.045 5016 S1L-210-16 37374 - 1) 0.047 50

5710 S1L-1000-10 37373 EKC-1 0.204 5016 S1L-1000-16 37375 EKC-1 0.302 50

2737 16 S1L-27-1000-16 37376 EKC-1 0.201 50

37 25 S1L-27-1000-25 37377 - 0.315 30

2 17.86 x 2

10 S2L-210-10 38476 - 1) 0.067 2016 S2L-210-16 38477 - 1) 0.11 20

28 x 2 16 S2L-1000-16 37378 EKC-2+3 0.477 20

2+N 1 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 22 x 2 16 S2L+N+9-1000-16 39849 EKC-2+3 0.71 20

3

17.8

2 x 310 S3L-106-10 38478 - 1) 0.055 2516 S3L-106-16 38479 - 1) 0.08 25

3 x 310 S3L-160-10 38480 - 1) 0.085 2516 S3L-160-16 38481 - 1) 0.115 25

4 x 310 S3L-210-10 38482 - 1) 0.11 2516 S3L-210-16 38483 - 1) 0.15 25

19 x 310 S3L-1000-10 38484 EKC-3 0.505 2016 S3L-1000-16 37379 EKC-2+3 0.737 20

2x 17.8 + 1x 26.8 16 x 3 16 S3L+9-1000-16 38485 - 0.72 20

27 12 x 316 S3L-27-1000-16 37380 EKC-2+3 0.537 2025 S3L-27-1000-25 37381 EKC-3-36 0.995 10

3+N 17.8 27 x 2 16 S3L+N-1000-16 38487 EKC-4 1.205 15

1 x 17.8 + 1 x 26.8 22 x 2 16 S3L+N+9-1000-16 39616 EKC-4 0.983 15

417.8 14 x 4 16 S4L-1000-16 38486 EKC-4 1.205 15

27 9 x 4 25 S4L-27-1000-25 37382 EKC-3-36 1.327 51) The busbar is manufactured as enclosed one2) For single-pole devices with auxiliary switch

Minia

E53

Other devices

Accessories

��For covering the ends of connecting busbars.

Type Product Description Weight Package

code [kg] [pcs]

EKC-1 37383 for 1-pole rails cross-section 10, 12, 16 mm2 0.0005 10EKC-2+3 37384 for 2-pole rails and for 3-pole rails cross-section 16 mm2 0.001 10EKC-3 37385 for 3-pole rails cross-section 10 mm2 0.001 10EKC-3-36 37386 for 3-pole rails and for 4-pole rails cross-section 25 mm2 0.002 10EKC-4 37387 for 4-pole rails cross-section 16 mm2 0.002 10

Type Product Weight Package

code [kg] [pcs]

ES-35-GS 37388 0.035 10

Power supply unit

��It enables power supply of interconnecting busbars

by conductors of cross section up to 35 mm2.

��The blocks can be assembled in series to create a multi-

pole connection unit.

��Degree of protection IP20.

End caps

Specifi cations

Type G1L-.., S1L-..,G2L-1000-16-DC G2L-..,G3L-..,G4L-..,S2L-..,S3L-..,S4L-..


690 V a.c. / 1000 V d.c. 415 V a.c.

Loading current 63 ÷ 180 A 63 ÷ 180 A

Cross-section 10 ÷ 25 mm2 10 ÷ 25 mm2

Short-circuit strength with backup fuse 250 A gG 50 kA 50 kA

Overvoltage category III III

Rated impulse withstand voltage 8 kV 8 kV


Busbar material E-Cu-F25 E-Cu-F25

Insulation material PC/ABS-Blend PC/ABS-Blend

Rail cross-section

10 mm2 12 mm2 16 mm2 20 mm2 24 mm2 25 mm2

Power supply from the rail edge 63 A 65 A 80 A 90 A 100 A 100 APower supply from the rail centre 1) 100 A 110 A 130 A 150 A 170 A 180 A1) Max. loading current in one direction must not be higher than max. loading current at power supply from the rail edge

Max. loading current per phase

Diagram

G3L+N-.., S3L+N-..

L2 L3L1 N N N

G4L-.., S4L-..

L3L1 L2 N

G3L-.., S3L-..

L1 L2 L3

G2L-.., S2L-..

L2(N)

L1

G1L-.., S1L-..

L1

S2L+N-..

L2L1 N N


Minia

E54

Other devices


Dimensions

972

37 x 1

6

627 12 2

155

14

G1L-27-1000-24979

28 x 2

6

617.8 11

17

29

1.5

15

G2L-1000-16

G1L-1000-12996.8

17.857x 1

6

126 1.5

16

5 14

996.8

57 x 1

6

17.8 126

15

6

2

15

G1L-1000-20

996.8

17.8

6

19 x 3 6 11

30

17

15

1.5

G3L-1000-16C

G3L-106-16, G3L-160-16, G3L-210-16

17.8

6

6 11

15

17

1.5

30

106 (G3L-106-16)

160 (G3L-160-16)

210 (G3L-210-16)

996.8

17.8

6

19 x 3 6 11

15

26

13.5

1

G3L-1000-10C

G3L-106-10, G3L-160-10, G3L-210-10

17.8

6

6 11

15

13

1

26

106 (G3L-106-10)

160 (G3L-160-10)

210 (G3L-210-10)

979

14 x 4

6

11617.8 1.5

20.5

30

17

G3L+N-1000-16, G4L-1000-16G3L+9-1000-16

16 x 3

971.6

17.8 26.8 11 6

6

30

17

15

1.5

ES-35-GS17.7 26

33

19.2

979

28 x 2

6

617.8 11

17

29

1.5

15

G2L-1000-16-DC

G1L-50-16-L

35.6

17.8

6

6 1.5

14

5

19

G1L-65-16-L

53.4

17.8

6

126 1.5

14

5

19

11

30 (G1L-30-10)

106 (G1L-106-10)

210 (G1L-210-10)

6

17.8 6

28

14

1

4

G1L-30-10, G1L-106-10, G1L-210-10

6

30 (G1L-30-16)

106 (G1L-106-16)

210 (G1L-210-16)

G1L-30-16, G1L-106-16, G1L-210-16

11

6

17.8 6

16

4

1.5

29.5

6

G1L-1000-16-L

996.8

17.8

6

126 1.5

14

5

19

57 x 1

Minia

E55

Other devices


Dimensions

29

17

15

1.5

S2L+N+9-1000-16

23 x 2

970.1

17.8 26.8 4

S1L-1000-10

57 x 1

996.8

17.8 4 1

14

5 14

S1L-1000-16

57 x 1

996.8

17.8 4

145

1.5

15

1.5

15

5 15

S1L-27-1000-16

27

972

437 x 1

20

5

218

S1L-27-1000-25

37 x 127

972

6.517

29

1.5

15

S2L-1000-16

28 x 217.8

979

4

28.5

16

1(1.5)

4

S1L-210-10, (S1L-210-16)

216

417.8

S2L-210-10, S2L-210-16

15

17

1.5

28.5

210

417.8

S3L-106-10, S3L-106-10, S3L210-10

15

14

1

25

106 (S3L-106-10)

160 (S3L-160-10)

212 (S3L-210-10)

417.8

S3L-1000-16

19 x 317.8

996.8

4

29

17

15

1.5

29

17

15

1.5

S3L-27-1000-16938

26.812 x 3

4

43

18.3

27

2

S3L-27-1000-25945

273x 12

6.5

29

17

15

1.5

S3L+9-1000-16

3x 16

970.1

17.8 26.8 4

S3L-106-16, S3L-106-16, S3L210-16

17

16

1.5

27

106 (S3L-106-16)

160 (S3L-160-16)

212 (S3L-210-16)

417.8

S3L-1000-10

19 x 317.8

996.8

425

12

15

1

S4L-27-1000-25

4x 927

945

6

42

24.6

2

27

1.5

20.5

30

17

S3L+N-1000-16979

417.84x 14

S3L+N+9-1000-16

1.5

20.5

30

17

22 x 2 17.8 26.8 4

Minia

E56

Other devices


Examples of use of interconnecting busbars

1-pole interconnecting busbars

For interconnection of 1-pole devices in the head part

of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, SJB, SVL, SVM, APN.

1-pole interconnecting busbars with spacing 27 mm

For interconnection of 1-pole devices with auxiliary switch

in the head part of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, APN.



of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, APN, OFE, OFI.



of the terminal.


3-pole interconnecting busbars with a gap on the

auxiliary switch

For interconnection of 3-pole devices with auxiliary switch

in the head part of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, APN.



of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, OFI, OFE, APN.


For interconnection of 1-pole devices in clamp part

of the terminal.



For interconnection of 1-pole circuit breakers LST in clamp

part of the terminal or for interconnection of 1-pole devices

with auxiliary switch in clamp part of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, LST, APN, AST.



of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, APN.



of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, APN.



part of the terminal or for interconnection of 1-pole devices

with auxiliary switch in clamp part of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, LST, APN, AST.



part of the terminal.

Use: LST, AST.

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS WITH FORKS

, ,

INTERCONNECTING BUSBARS WIHT PINS

Minia

E57

Other devices

Terminal extension up to 25 mm2 with fork

��For connection of another conductor to the head part

of the terminal of a circuit breaker, residual current

circuit breaker, tumbler power switch etc.

��For example, the best solution is to connect a conductor

for power supply of an electric meter in the clamp

part of the circuit breaker terminal, and another

conductor through the connecting adapter AS-25-G

in the head part of the circuit breaker terminal.

��Conductor cross-section: 6 ÷ 25 mm2.

Terminal extension 3x10 mm2

��For connection of 3 conductors/device pole of cross

section 10 mm2.

Type Product Accessories Weight Packagecode to [kg] [pcs]

AS-25-G 37390 LPE, LPN, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN 0.013 30

Terminal extension up to 25 mm2 with pin

��For connection of conductors to the clamp part of the

terminal.

��Conductor cross-section: 6 ÷ 25 mm2.


AS-25-S 37389 OFI-..-2-...., OFE-..-2-...., RLP 0.014 30

Terminal extension up to 50 mm2

��For connection of Al or Cu conductors. ��Cross-section of Cu conductors: 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2.

��Cross-section of Al conductors: 2.5 ÷ 50 mm2.


AS-50-S-AL01 38749 LPE, LPN, LST, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN, AST 0.018 1

Terminal extensions up to 95 mm2

��For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section

35 ÷ 95 mm2.

��With direct or outbowed terminal.

Type Product Accessories Weight Package

code to [kg] [pcs]

CS-FH000-3NP95 13740straight terminal – the package contains the set of 3 pieces

LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST 0.176 1

CS-FH000-1NP95 14378 straight terminal LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST 0.06 1

CS-FH000-3NV95 13742outbowed terminal – the package contains the set of 3 pieces

LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST 0.184 1


N3x10-FH000 14127 LST, OLE, OLI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVM, AST 0.035 1

TERMINAL EXTENSIONS

Minia

E58

Other devices

TERMINAL EXTENSIONS

Dimensions

611.5

2.5

15 17

20.5

15 17

20.5

2.54

24.5

13

17 23.5 8

7 7

24.5 17.5

27

7 6

23 32.5

38

23 32.5

38

4 410 10

AS-25-S N3x10-FH000AS-25-G

CS-FH000-...NP95 CS-FH000-3NV95

AS-50-AL01

AS-25-G

For connection of another conductor of cross section

up to 25 mm2 to the head part of the terminal.

Use: LPE, LPN, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC, SVM, APN.

AS-25-S

For connection of conductors of cross section

up to 25 mm2 to the clamp part of the terminal.

Use: OFI-..-2-.., OFE-..-2-.., RLP.

AS-50-S-AL01

For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section


Use: LPE, LPN, LST, OLE, OLI, OFE, OFI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVC,

SVM, APN, AST.

Examples of use of connecting adapters and blocks

CS-FH000-3NP95, CS-FH000-1NP95, CS-FH000-3NV95

For connection of Cu/Al conductors of cross section


Use: LST, SJBplus, SJB-NPE, AST.

N3x10-FH000

For connection of three conductors of cross section 10 mm2

to the clamp part of one terminal.

Use: LST, OLE, OLI, SJB, SJBC, SVBC, SVM, AST.

Minia

E59

Other devices

Terminal board

��For branching lr connection of PEN, PE, N and L conductors.

��They are used in switchboards, which are not delivered

with terminal blocks.

��Mounting on 35 mm „U“ rail according to EN 60715.

��Colour: green, blue, grey.

Dimensions

CS-L7

13

53

266

CS-L15

13

107

266

CS-L12

13

88

266

23

6

104

51.5

5.5

4.525

23.5

CS-N15, CS-PE15

51.5

5.5

4.525

23.523

CS-N7, CS-PE7

23

6

8551.5

5.5 23.5

4.525

CS-N12, CS-PE12

Type CS-PE, CS-N, CS-L


Approval marks


Connection 1 ÷ 16 mm2

Specifi cations

Colour Number Type Product Weight Packageof terminals code [kg] [pcs]

7 x 16 mm2 CS-N7 35901 0.026 10blue 12 x 16 mm2 CS-N12 35902 0.030 10

15 x 16 mm2 CS-N15 35903 0.048 10

7 x 16 mm2 CS-PE7 35904 0.026 10green 12 x 16 mm2 CS-PE12 35905 0.030 10

15 x 16 mm2 CS-PE15 35906 0.048 10

7 x 16 mm2 CS-L7 1) 35898 0.026 10grey 12 x 16 mm2 CS-L12 1) 35899 0.030 10

15 x 16 mm2 CS-L15 1) 35900 0.048 101) covered design

TERMINAL BOARD

Minia

E60

Other devices

NOTES

Minia

F1

Modular devices

GLOSSARYNote: Precise defi nitions and texts relating to the specifi ed terms, are contained in relevant standards see Name.

Name Symbol Interpretation

Rated operating voltage

EN 60898-1; 5.2.1.1

EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.1

Ue

The value of voltage stated by the manufacturer. Relevant tests or utilization categories relate to it.

Together with rated (operating) current, it determines the use of the device. Maximum value of rated

operating voltage must never be higher than the value of rated insulation voltage.


Maximum value of operating voltage, at which device function is not endangered.


Minimum value of voltage conditioning correct function (of circuit breakers, switches etc.) or test

of correct function (residual current circuit breakers).

Rated current

EN 60898-1; 5.2.2

IEC 755; 4.2.5

EN 61008-1; 5.2.2

EN 61009-1; 5.2.2

In

The value of current assigned to a circuit breaker or residual current circuit breaker by the manufacturer,

which the device can conduct continuously. For circuit breakers and residual current circuit breakers

with overcurrent release also at a reference temperature.

Rated operating current

EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.3

Ie

Rated operating current of the device is stated by the manufacturer with regard to rated operating

voltage, rated frequency, rated duty, utilization category and enclosure type, if applicable.

Utilization category

EN 60947-1; 4.4; Supplement A

AC-xx

DC-xx

Utilization category of a device defi nes its assumed use. It is characterized by one or several operating

conditions: current expressed as multiple of Ie, voltage expressed as multiple of U

e, power factor or time

constant, short-circuit behaviour, selectivity, other operating conditions depending on circumstances.

Rated thermal current without cover

EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.1

Ith

Maximum value of current, which can be transferred by open device in eight-hour operation without

exceeding its permissible temperature rise.

Rated thermal current with cover

EN 60947-1; 4.3.2.2

Ithe

Maximum value of current, which can be transferred by a device in specifi ed enclosure in eight-hour

operation without exceeding its permissible temperature rise.

Rated short-circuit ultimate breaking

capacity

EN 60898-1; 3.5.5.1

Icu

The value of short-circuit current expressed as root-mean-square value of alternating component

of prospective short-circuit current in place of utilization of the circuit breaker, which it must be able to

switch off repeatedly. After the test the circuit breaker need not be able to conduct 0.85 multiple of its

non-switching current for an agreed time.

Rated short-circuit service breaking capacity

EN 60898-1; 3.5.5.2

Ics

The value of short-circuit current expressed as root-mean-square value of alternating component

of prospective short-circuit current in place of utilization of the circuit breaker, which it must be able to

switch off repeatedly under test conditions (EN 60 898-1; 9.12.11.4.2 and 9.12.12.1). After the test the

circuit breaker shall be able to conduct 0.85 multiple of its non-switching current for an agreed time.

Rated short-circuit breaking capacity

EN 60898-1; 5.2.4

Icn

The value of rated short-circuit ultimate breaking capacity stated for this circuit breaker by the

manufacturer in accordance with test conditions (EN 60 898-1; 9.12.11.4.2 and 9.12.12.1)

The following must apply: Icn

≥ Ik“

Energy limitation class

EN 60898-1; Supplement ZA

It determines maximum value of I2t [A2s] released by the circuit breaker depending on its In, I

cn and type

of tripping characteristic. It makes it possible to state selectivity with a backup fuse (I2t released by the

circuit breakers must be less than blowing current I2t of the fuse) and short-circuit protection of the

cable (I2t released by the circuit breaker must be less or equal to S2k2 of the cable). On the basis of classes

of energy limitation it is not possible to state unambiguously selectivity of two circuit breakers in series.

Rated frequency

EN 60898-1; 5.2.3

EN 60947-1; 4.3.3

IEC 755; 4.2.5

fn

Network frequency the device is designed for and the other characteristic values correspond to.

Minia

F2

Modular devices

GLOSSARY

Name Symbol Interpretation

Rated conditional short-circuit current

EN 60947-1; 4.3.6.4

IEC 755; 4.3.2

Inc

The value of prospective short-circuit current stated by the manufacturer, which can be reliably

transferred by a short-circuit protection device stated by the manufacturer for the time of operation

of this device.

The following must apply: Inc

≥ Ik“

Initial peak short-circuit current

EN 60909-0; 1.3.5

Ik

“ The value of short-circuit current at the moment of its origin in given point of wiring expressed as root-

mean-square value of alternating symmetric component of prospective short-circuit current.

Prospective current

EN 60898-1; 3.5.2

Ip

Current, which would have passed through the circuit, if every pole of the circuit breaker be replaced

by a conductor of a negligible impedance.

Rated residual operating current

IEC 755; 4.2.2

EN 61008-1; 5.2.3

EN 61009-1; 5.2.3

IΔn

Root-mean-square value of residual operating current stated for the residual current circuit breaker

by the manufacturer, at which the residual current circuit breaker must operate under stated conditions.

Rated impulse withstand voltage

EN 60664-1; 1.3.8.1; 1.3.9.2

EN 60947-1; 4.3.1.3

EN 60898-1; 5.2.1.3

EN 61008-1; 5.2.1.Z1

Uimp

Peak value of voltage impulse of a prescribed shape and polarity, which the device is able to withstand

without failure under stated conditions and to which the values of aerial distances relate. Uimp

of the

device must be equal to or higher than the value stated for transient overvoltage in the point of the

circuit (overvoltage category) the device is used in.

Overvoltage category

EN 60664-1; 2.2.2.1

EN 60947-1; 2.5.60

EN 60898-1; 3.6.5

EN 61008-1; 3.Z1.5

EN 61009-1; 3.Z1.5

Numerically defi ned level of transient overvoltage i.e. overvoltage originating from atmospheric or

switching overvoltage. Standard EN 60664-1 states for electric equipment overvoltage categories:

Overvoltage category IV: beginning of installation, outside lead

Overvoltage category III: fi xed wiring

Overvoltage category II: appliances

Overvoltage category I: light-current appliance

Maximum constant operating voltage

EN 61643-11; 3.11

Uc

Maximum root-mean-square value of alternating or direct current voltage, which can be permanently

applied to the arrester terminals. It must be equal to or higher than rated network voltage.

Voltage protection level

EN 61643-11; 3.15

Up

Maximum instantaneous value of voltage on the arrester, determined by appropriate tests. It

characterizes arrester action in voltage limitation on its terminals.

Rated discharge current

EN 61643-11; 3.8

In

Peak value of current with impulse shape 8/20 μs, for which the arrester is rated. It can pass through it

repeatedly. (It relates to T2.)

Maximum discharge current

EN 61643-11; 3.10

Imax

Peak value of current with impulse shape 8/20 μs, at which the surge voltage arrester still is not

damaged. This current can pass through the arrester twice, while the disconnecting device can only

react at the second impulse. (It relates to T2.)

Lightning current

EN 61643-11; 3.9

Iimp

It is defi ned by three parameters – peak current Ipeak, charge Q and specifi c energy W/R. Lightning

current arresters must be able to release impulse current at least twice without their damage. (It relates

to T1.)

Quenching follow-current

EN 61643-11; 3.41

Ifi

Short-circuit current, the arrester itself is able to interrupt. (It relates to T1.)

Rated loading current

EN 61643-11; 3.14

IL

Maximum permanent rated root-mean-square or direct current, which can fl ow in a load connected

to protected output terminals of the surge voltage arrester. (It relates tok T3.)

MiniaModular devices

NOTES

Minia Modular devices

NOTES

www.oez.com

OEZ s.r.o.Šedivská 339561 51 LetohradCzech Republictel.: +420 465 672 111 +420 465 672 101fax: +420 465 672 398 +420 465 672 151e-mail: [email protected]

Minia

Min

ia

Modular devices

Mod

ular

dev

ices

Any changes reserved

N1-2011-A

www.oez.com

Modular devices Minia

Documents

devices index

miniature circuit breakers

e29 e59cs

catalogue distribution

comoez s

switchboard cabinets

letohradczech republictel

gs b7lst